1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \default_output_format pdf2
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 0
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation skip
134 \quotes_language english
137 \paperpagestyle default
138 \tracking_changes true
139 \output_changes false
143 \author 274215730 "scott"
144 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
155 by the \SpecialChar LyX
160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
162 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
163 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
164 Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
197 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
205 \begin_layout Standard
206 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
207 LatexCommand tableofcontents
214 \begin_layout Chapter
218 \begin_layout Section
219 What is \SpecialChar LyX
223 \begin_layout Standard
225 is a document preparation system.
226 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
227 scripts, publishable books, business
228 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
229 It is unlike most other
230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
237 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
239 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
255 pt type, left justified, 5
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
265 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
269 \begin_layout Standard
270 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
275 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
279 \begin_layout Standard
284 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
285 's philosophy: most importantly,
286 the format of all of the manuals.
287 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
288 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
294 manual describes that, too.
297 \begin_layout Section
302 \begin_layout Standard
303 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
304 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
306 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
307 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
311 \begin_layout Standard
312 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
313 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
314 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
316 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
317 only a vertical scrollbar.
318 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
319 The first case is large images.
320 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
321 image and use the option
332 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
335 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
336 this doesn't work for equations yet.
339 \begin_layout Standard
340 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
341 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
349 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
356 \begin_layout Section
360 \begin_layout Standard
361 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
363 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
365 Just select the manual you want to read from the
372 \begin_layout Section
373 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
377 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
384 \begin_layout Standard
385 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
386 can be configured via the menu
388 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
392 \begin_inset Index idx
395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
402 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
404 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
405 packages are available.
406 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
408 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
410 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
415 \begin_inset space \space{}
418 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
419 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
421 To force \SpecialChar LyX
422 to re-inspect your system, you should use
424 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
428 \begin_inset Index idx
431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
432 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
438 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
439 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
442 \begin_layout Section
445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
447 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
454 \begin_layout Standard
455 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
456 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
457 installed, but you will not be
458 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
459 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
460 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
461 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
462 document can always be output as plain text
466 \begin_layout Standard
467 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
468 or DocBook classes or packages.
469 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
470 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
473 \begin_layout Standard
474 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
475 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
476 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
479 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
487 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
488 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
491 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
495 \begin_inset Index idx
498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
499 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
507 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
514 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 \begin_layout Chapter
519 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
523 \begin_layout Section
524 Basic File Operations
525 \begin_inset Index idx
528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
537 \begin_layout Standard
542 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
543 in addition to some more advanced operations:
546 \begin_layout Itemize
568 \begin_layout Itemize
584 arg "buffer-new-template"
590 \begin_layout Itemize
612 \begin_layout Itemize
622 \begin_layout Itemize
636 \begin_layout Itemize
658 \begin_layout Itemize
670 arg "buffer-write-as"
676 \begin_layout Itemize
690 \begin_layout Itemize
704 \begin_layout Standard
705 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
706 a few minor differences.
709 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
720 command lists the available templates.
721 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
722 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
723 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
731 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
738 \begin_layout Standard
739 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
771 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
772 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
773 is just that — a big, blank space.
781 \begin_layout Standard
802 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
807 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
810 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
828 will reload the document from disk.
829 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
830 and want to restore it to the last save.
839 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
840 them as your changes.
843 \begin_layout Section
844 Basic Editing Features
845 \begin_inset Index idx
848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
857 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
864 \begin_layout Standard
865 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
866 can perform cut and paste operations
867 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
868 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
869 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
870 editing features and how to access
872 We will start with cut and paste.
875 \begin_layout Standard
876 As you might expect, the
880 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
881 various other editing features.
882 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
886 \begin_layout Itemize
892 \begin_inset Index idx
895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
924 \begin_layout Itemize
930 \begin_inset Index idx
933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
962 \begin_layout Itemize
968 \begin_inset Index idx
971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
996 \begin_layout Itemize
1000 \begin_inset space ~
1006 \begin_layout Itemize
1010 \begin_inset space ~
1016 \begin_layout Itemize
1020 \begin_inset space ~
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1030 \begin_inset Index idx
1033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1042 \begin_inset Index idx
1045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1060 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1070 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1076 \begin_layout Standard
1077 The first three are self-explanatory.
1078 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1079 and other programs by
1100 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1101 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1106 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1107 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1108 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1109 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1110 into individual cells.
1114 \begin_inset space ~
1119 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1120 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1124 \begin_layout Standard
1128 \begin_inset space ~
1133 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1135 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1137 \begin_inset space ~
1144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1150 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1151 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1152 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1158 \begin_inset space \space{}
1161 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1162 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1165 \begin_inset space ~
1168 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1178 \begin_inset space ~
1187 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1188 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1190 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1199 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1200 start a new paragraph.
1201 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1202 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1210 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1216 \begin_inset space ~
1224 \begin_inset space ~
1227 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1230 paste from the primary selection.
1231 This is normally the currently selected text.
1234 \begin_layout Standard
1237 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1239 \begin_inset space ~
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1251 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1261 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1267 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1270 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1284 button to skip the current word.
1288 \begin_inset space ~
1293 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1302 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1304 If the toggle is set, searching for
1305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1316 will not match the word
1317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1331 Match whole words only
1333 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1334 to only find complete words, e.
1335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1364 offers also an advanced
1367 \begin_inset space ~
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1376 feature that is described in section
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1383 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1390 \begin_layout Standard
1391 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1392 \begin_inset space \space{}
1396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1404 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1406 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1411 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1418 \begin_layout Standard
1422 arg "inset-select-all"
1425 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1426 When the cursor is inside an inset
1429 arg "inset-select-all"
1432 selects the content of the inset.
1436 arg "inset-select-all"
1439 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1444 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1447 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1451 \begin_layout Section
1453 \begin_inset Index idx
1456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1463 \begin_inset Index idx
1466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1475 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1482 \begin_layout Standard
1483 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1485 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1488 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1491 or the toolbar button
1497 to undo some mistake.
1498 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1500 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1503 or the toolbar button
1510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1517 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1521 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1524 \begin_layout Standard
1525 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1534 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1535 This is a consequence of the 100
1536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1539 step undo limit mentioned above.
1542 \begin_layout Standard
1551 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1553 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1557 \begin_layout Section
1559 \begin_inset Index idx
1562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1571 \begin_layout Standard
1572 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1575 \begin_layout Enumerate
1580 \begin_layout Itemize
1585 once anywhere in the edit window.
1586 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1590 \begin_layout Enumerate
1595 \begin_layout Itemize
1602 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1605 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1608 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1609 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1612 \begin_layout Itemize
1613 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1616 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1623 \begin_layout Enumerate
1624 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1628 \begin_layout Standard
1629 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1630 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1634 \begin_layout Section
1636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1638 name "sec:Navigating"
1643 \begin_inset Index idx
1646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1655 \begin_layout Standard
1657 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1660 \begin_layout Itemize
1665 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1666 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1669 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1672 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1674 \begin_inset space ~
1679 or by the toolbar button
1682 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1688 \begin_layout Itemize
1689 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1691 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1694 and use the same menu to return to them.
1695 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1698 \begin_layout Standard
1702 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1707 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1708 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 \begin_inset space ~
1715 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1716 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1717 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1718 your last editing position.
1721 \begin_layout Standard
1726 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1730 \begin_layout Subsection
1732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1734 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1739 \begin_inset Index idx
1742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1743 Navigating ! Outline
1749 \begin_inset Index idx
1752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1761 \begin_layout Standard
1762 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1763 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1764 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1766 \begin_inset space ~
1770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1772 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1776 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1777 \begin_inset space ~
1781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1783 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1788 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1792 \begin_layout Standard
1793 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1794 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1795 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1796 dialog and to modify the citation.
1799 \begin_layout Standard
1800 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1802 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1803 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1811 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1814 \begin_layout Standard
1815 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1816 you further to control the display.
1821 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1822 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1828 option keeps it in the current view state.
1829 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1830 \begin_inset space ~
1833 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1834 \begin_inset space ~
1837 3, the subsections of sections
1838 \begin_inset space ~
1841 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1846 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1847 \begin_inset space ~
1851 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1861 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1864 \begin_layout Standard
1871 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1872 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1886 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1887 So, for example, you can move section
1888 \begin_inset space ~
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 2.4 or after section
1896 \begin_inset space ~
1901 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1914 (or the corresponding key bindings
1922 ) you can change the level of sections.
1923 So you can for example make section
1924 \begin_inset space ~
1928 \begin_inset space ~
1932 \begin_inset space ~
1938 \begin_layout Standard
1939 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1940 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1943 \begin_layout Subsection
1944 Horizontal Scrolling
1945 \begin_inset Index idx
1948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1949 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_layout Standard
1959 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1965 \begin_inset space \space{}
1969 \begin_inset space ~
1972 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1973 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1974 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1978 \begin_layout Standard
1979 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1983 \begin_layout Itemize
1985 is used on a small tablet computer
1988 \begin_layout Itemize
1989 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2001 \begin_inset space ~
2014 \begin_layout Itemize
2015 Math constructs with long command names
2018 \begin_layout Standard
2019 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2020 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2022 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2023 windows so that table
2024 \begin_inset space ~
2028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2030 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2035 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2037 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2038 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2041 \begin_layout Standard
2042 \begin_inset Float table
2048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2049 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2054 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2058 Horizontal scrolling test.
2066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2068 \begin_inset Tabular
2069 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2070 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2071 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2072 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2115 \begin_layout Section
2116 Input/Word Completion
2117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2119 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2124 \begin_inset Index idx
2127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2134 \begin_inset Index idx
2137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Standard
2170 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2172 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2173 is used to propose completions.
2176 \begin_layout Standard
2177 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2180 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2185 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2192 \begin_inset space ~
2196 \begin_inset space ~
2201 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2205 \begin_inset space ~
2210 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2211 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2215 \begin_inset space ~
2221 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2222 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2223 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2224 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2227 \begin_layout Standard
2229 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2230 completions available.
2235 key to accept a proposed completion.
2236 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2237 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2238 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2245 \begin_layout Standard
2246 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2247 ing options for text.
2248 The special math option
2252 enables characters to be composed.
2253 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2254 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2257 , you can then input the characters
2258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2269 to a formula to get it.
2270 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2271 of the math toolbar.
2272 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2276 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2277 's installation folder.
2278 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2287 \begin_layout Section
2289 \begin_inset Index idx
2292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2299 \begin_inset Index idx
2302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_inset Index idx
2334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2365 \begin_layout Standard
2366 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2380 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2383 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2387 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2388 \begin_inset space ~
2392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2394 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2401 \begin_layout Standard
2405 \begin_inset space ~
2413 \begin_inset space ~
2434 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2438 \begin_layout Labeling
2439 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2443 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2444 LatexCommand nomenclature
2446 description "Tabulator key"
2452 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2454 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2455 \begin_inset space ~
2459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2461 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2468 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2472 , especially section
2473 \begin_inset space ~
2477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2479 reference "subsec:Lists"
2485 If you are still confused, look in the
2490 \begin_inset Newline newline
2498 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2499 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2503 \begin_layout Labeling
2504 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2508 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2509 LatexCommand nomenclature
2511 description "Escape key"
2518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2525 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2526 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2529 \begin_layout Labeling
2530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2536 \begin_inset space ~
2540 \begin_inset space ~
2547 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2548 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2552 \begin_layout Standard
2553 There are three modifier keys:
2556 \begin_layout Labeling
2557 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2575 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2576 LatexCommand nomenclature
2578 description "Control key"
2582 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2583 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2587 \begin_layout Itemize
2596 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2599 \begin_layout Itemize
2608 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2611 \begin_layout Itemize
2620 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2624 \begin_layout Labeling
2625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2643 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2644 LatexCommand nomenclature
2646 description "Shift key"
2650 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2651 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2654 \begin_layout Labeling
2655 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2673 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2674 LatexCommand nomenclature
2676 description "Alt or Meta key"
2680 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2681 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2682 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2688 \begin_inset Newline newline
2691 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2693 menu accelerator keys
2696 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2697 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2701 \begin_layout Standard
2702 For example, the sequence
2703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2709 \begin_inset space ~
2713 \begin_inset space ~
2719 \begin_inset space ~
2727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2746 \begin_inset space ~
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2762 \begin_layout Standard
2767 manual lists all other things bound to the
2775 \begin_layout Standard
2776 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2778 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2779 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2780 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2781 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2782 The \SpecialChar LyX
2783 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2784 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2785 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2787 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2803 followed by a capital
2810 \begin_layout Chapter
2813 \begin_inset Index idx
2816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2826 \begin_layout Section
2828 \begin_inset Index idx
2831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2840 \begin_layout Subsection
2844 \begin_layout Standard
2845 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2846 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2847 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2848 numbering schemes, and so on.
2849 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2850 and format the title of your document differently.
2853 \begin_layout Standard
2858 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2859 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2860 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2861 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2862 picks one for you by default.
2863 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2866 \begin_layout Subsection
2868 \begin_inset Index idx
2871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2880 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2887 \begin_layout Standard
2888 You can select a class using the
2890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2891 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2895 \begin_inset Index idx
2898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2905 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2909 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2913 \begin_layout Standard
2914 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2919 \begin_layout Description
2920 Article for basic articles
2923 \begin_layout Description
2924 Report for basic reports
2927 \begin_layout Description
2928 Book for writing a book
2931 \begin_layout Description
2932 Letter for US-style letters
2935 \begin_layout Standard
2936 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2937 only uses if you have installed
2938 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2939 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2940 distributions will include
2942 Here are some of the classes.
2943 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2945 Special Document Classes
2954 \begin_layout Description
2955 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2958 \begin_layout Description
2959 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2963 \begin_layout Description
2964 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2968 \begin_layout Description
2969 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2970 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2971 There are three article layouts available.
2972 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2973 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2974 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2975 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2980 sequential numbering
2981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2984 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2985 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2986 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2987 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2990 \begin_layout Description
2991 Beamer Layout for presentations
2994 \begin_layout Description
2995 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2996 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2997 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2998 with \SpecialChar LyX
3002 \begin_layout Description
3003 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3006 \begin_layout Description
3008 \begin_inset space ~
3011 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3014 \begin_layout Description
3015 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Foils Used to make transparencies
3022 \begin_layout Description
3023 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3024 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3025 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3026 with \SpecialChar LyX
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3032 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3043 \begin_layout Description
3044 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3045 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3046 (Is used by this document.)
3049 \begin_layout Description
3050 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3053 \begin_layout Description
3054 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3057 \begin_layout Description
3062 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3063 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3065 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Slides Used to make transparencies
3073 \begin_layout Description
3075 \begin_inset space ~
3078 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3079 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3082 \begin_layout Description
3083 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3086 \begin_layout Standard
3087 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3089 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3091 Special Document Classes
3098 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3099 of the document classes.
3102 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3106 \begin_layout Standard
3107 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3109 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3110 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3112 \begin_inset Index idx
3115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3132 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3133 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3135 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3138 \begin_layout Standard
3141 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3146 , are highly specialized.
3148 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3149 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3150 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3151 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3152 by some document class.
3153 There are just too many of them.
3154 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3157 \begin_layout Standard
3158 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3166 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3167 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3168 document class for a new file.
3170 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3173 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3180 manual for information on how to install them.
3181 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3187 \begin_layout Standard
3188 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3189 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3190 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3191 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3192 class files to be used for dissertation
3193 s submitted to those universities.
3194 The \SpecialChar LyX
3195 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3197 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3201 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3207 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3210 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3212 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3214 name "subsec:Modules"
3219 \begin_inset Index idx
3222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3231 \begin_layout Standard
3232 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3233 chosen document class.
3234 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3235 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3242 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3246 \begin_inset Index idx
3249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3256 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3260 \begin_layout Standard
3261 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3262 packages or file format converters that are not always
3263 installed by default.
3265 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3266 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3267 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3268 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3270 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3271 file without the missing prerequisites.
3272 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3273 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3276 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3280 \begin_inset Index idx
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3284 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3290 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3295 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3298 \begin_layout Standard
3299 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3307 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3309 will advise you about these things.
3317 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3321 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3326 \begin_inset Index idx
3329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3330 Document ! Local Layout
3338 \begin_layout Standard
3339 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3340 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3341 : They are intended to be used in
3342 a variety of different documents.
3343 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3344 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3345 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3346 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3347 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3349 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3367 manual for information on how to use it.
3370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3374 \begin_layout Standard
3375 Each class has a default set of options.
3376 Here's a quick table describing them:
3379 \begin_layout Standard
3380 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3386 \begin_layout Standard
3388 \begin_inset Tabular
3389 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3390 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3391 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3392 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3393 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3394 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3849 \begin_layout Standard
3850 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3856 \begin_layout Standard
3857 You're probably also wondering what
3858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3862 \begin_inset space ~
3866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3870 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3871 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3876 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3881 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3891 headings, there are also
3899 headings, and so on.
3900 We will describe these headings fully in section
3901 \begin_inset space ~
3905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3907 reference "subsec:Headings"
3914 \begin_layout Subsection
3916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3918 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3923 \begin_inset Index idx
3926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3933 \begin_inset Index idx
3936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3945 \begin_layout Standard
3946 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3955 \begin_inset space ~
3963 \begin_inset space ~
3968 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3970 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3971 doesn't support special options you want to
3972 use for your document.
3973 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3974 -class and its options, you have to read
3978 \begin_layout Standard
3982 \begin_inset space ~
3989 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3995 \begin_inset space ~
4000 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4001 You can choose between the following five options:
4004 \begin_layout Labeling
4005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4010 Use default page style of current class.
4013 \begin_layout Labeling
4014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4019 No page numbers or headings.
4022 \begin_layout Labeling
4023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4031 \begin_layout Labeling
4032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4037 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4038 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4039 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4040 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4043 \begin_layout Labeling
4044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4049 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4050 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4061 -packages ! fancyhdr
4067 How they are defined is explained in section
4068 \begin_inset space ~
4072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4074 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4081 \begin_layout Standard
4082 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4083 \begin_inset space ~
4087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4089 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4096 \begin_layout Subsection
4097 Paper Size and Orientation
4098 \begin_inset Index idx
4101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4102 Document ! Paper size
4108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4110 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4117 \begin_layout Standard
4118 You can find the following options in the menu
4121 \begin_inset space ~
4128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4132 \begin_inset Index idx
4135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4144 \begin_layout Labeling
4145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4149 \begin_inset space ~
4154 What size paper to print on.
4159 \begin_layout Itemize
4165 \begin_layout Itemize
4171 \begin_layout Itemize
4177 \begin_layout Itemize
4183 \begin_layout Itemize
4186 US letter, US legal, US executive
4189 \begin_layout Itemize
4195 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 \begin_layout Labeling
4203 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4208 To choose whether to output as
4219 \begin_layout Labeling
4220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 \begin_inset space ~
4229 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4230 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4233 \begin_layout Subsection
4235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4237 name "subsec:Margins"
4242 \begin_inset Index idx
4245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4252 \begin_inset Index idx
4255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4264 \begin_layout Standard
4265 Paper margins are set in the menu
4267 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4271 \begin_inset Index idx
4274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4283 \begin_layout Standard
4284 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4285 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4286 the paper format and the font size into account.
4289 \begin_layout Subsection
4293 \begin_layout Standard
4294 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4300 That includes the paragraph environments.
4301 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4302 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4303 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4305 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4314 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4316 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4317 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4318 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4321 \begin_layout Section
4322 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4323 \begin_inset Index idx
4326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4327 Paragraph ! Indentation
4335 \begin_layout Subsection
4337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4339 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4346 \begin_layout Standard
4347 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4348 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4351 \begin_layout Standard
4352 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4353 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4354 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4355 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4359 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4365 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4366 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4367 language than English.
4369 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4372 \begin_layout Standard
4373 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4374 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4375 into \SpecialChar LyX
4377 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4380 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4382 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4383 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4384 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4391 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4392 goes to produce a printable file.
4397 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4399 gives you the ability globally to change
4403 these pre-coded spacings.
4404 We will explain more later.
4407 \begin_layout Subsection
4408 Paragraph Separation
4409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4411 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4416 \begin_inset Index idx
4419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4420 Paragraph ! Separation
4428 \begin_layout Standard
4436 \begin_inset space ~
4444 \begin_inset space ~
4451 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4455 \begin_inset Index idx
4458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4464 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4467 \begin_layout Subsection
4471 \begin_layout Standard
4472 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4475 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4477 \begin_inset space ~
4482 dialog and toggle the
4485 \begin_inset space ~
4490 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4493 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4497 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4498 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4502 \begin_layout Standard
4503 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4504 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4507 \begin_layout Subsection
4509 \begin_inset Index idx
4512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4513 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4521 \begin_layout Standard
4524 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4528 \begin_inset Index idx
4531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4540 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4544 \begin_inset space ~
4553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4554 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4560 \begin_inset Index idx
4563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4565 -packages ! setspace
4570 installed to use this feature.
4575 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4577 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4579 \begin_inset space ~
4584 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4585 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4588 \begin_layout Section
4589 Paragraph Environments
4590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4592 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4597 \begin_inset Index idx
4600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4601 Paragraph ! Environments
4607 \begin_inset Index idx
4610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4611 Paragraph environments|(
4619 \begin_layout Subsection
4623 \begin_layout Standard
4624 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4627 \begin_layout Standard
4636 } \SpecialChar ldots
4646 \begin_inset Newline newline
4649 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4651 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4652 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4653 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4662 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4665 \begin_layout Standard
4666 A paragraph environment is simply a
4667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4674 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4675 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4676 scheme, labels, and so on.
4677 Additionally, you can
4678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4685 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4686 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4687 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4688 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4690 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4692 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4695 \begin_layout Standard
4696 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4697 \begin_inset Graphics
4698 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4704 at the left end of the toolbar.
4706 will change the environment of the
4710 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4711 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4712 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4716 \begin_layout Standard
4725 create a new paragraph using the
4729 paragraph environment.
4731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4738 because if you are in one of these environments:
4741 \begin_layout Itemize
4747 \begin_layout Itemize
4753 \begin_layout Itemize
4759 \begin_layout Itemize
4765 \begin_layout Itemize
4771 \begin_layout Itemize
4777 \begin_layout Itemize
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4785 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4789 , rather than resetting it to
4794 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4795 \begin_inset space ~
4799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4801 reference "sec:Nesting"
4808 \begin_layout Subsection
4812 \begin_layout Standard
4813 The default paragraph environment is
4818 It creates a plain paragraph.
4820 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4821 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4822 this manual) are in the
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 You can nest a paragraph using the
4834 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4842 \begin_layout Subsection
4844 \begin_inset Index idx
4847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4856 \begin_layout Standard
4857 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4858 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4867 for thanks or contact information.
4868 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4869 places all of this on a separate page
4870 along with today's date.
4871 For other types of documents, the title
4872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4879 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4883 \begin_layout Standard
4885 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4899 Here's how you use them:
4902 \begin_layout Itemize
4903 Put the title of your document in the
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4911 Put the author name in the
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4920 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4926 Note that using this environment is optional.
4927 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4928 will automatically insert today's date.
4929 If you don't want a date, use the option
4931 Suppress default date on front page
4935 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4936 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4938 \begin_inset space ~
4946 \begin_layout Standard
4947 You can use footnotes to insert
4948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4955 or contact information.
4958 \begin_layout Subsection
4960 \begin_inset Index idx
4963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4972 name "subsec:Headings"
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4982 takes care of the numbering for you.
4985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4987 \begin_inset Index idx
4990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4991 Section headings ! Numbered
4999 \begin_layout Standard
5000 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5004 \begin_layout Enumerate
5010 \begin_layout Enumerate
5016 \begin_layout Enumerate
5022 \begin_layout Enumerate
5028 \begin_layout Enumerate
5034 \begin_layout Enumerate
5040 \begin_layout Enumerate
5046 \begin_layout Standard
5048 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5049 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5050 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5053 \begin_layout Standard
5054 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5055 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5056 You group the book into chapters.
5058 does a similar grouping:
5061 \begin_layout Itemize
5066 is divided into either
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5089 \begin_layout Itemize
5101 \begin_layout Itemize
5113 \begin_layout Itemize
5125 \begin_layout Itemize
5137 \begin_layout Standard
5138 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5146 Not all document types use the
5150 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5155 is the top-level heading.
5163 \begin_layout Standard
5168 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5169 labels it with its number,
5170 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5172 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5184 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5186 \begin_inset Index idx
5189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5190 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5198 \begin_layout Standard
5199 The unnumbered section headings have a
5200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5207 at the end of their name.
5208 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5209 the table of contents, see section
5210 \begin_inset space ~
5214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5223 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5224 Changing the Numbering
5225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5227 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5234 \begin_layout Standard
5235 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5236 in the Table of Contents.
5237 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5239 Just as certain classes start with
5253 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5263 This is something you can change.
5266 \begin_layout Standard
5269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5273 \begin_inset Index idx
5276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5285 \begin_inset space ~
5289 \begin_inset space ~
5294 you will see two counters.
5299 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5300 numbers a section heading.
5301 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5306 Short Titles of Headings
5307 \begin_inset Index idx
5310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5311 Section headings ! Short titles
5317 \begin_inset Argument 1
5320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5329 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5336 \begin_layout Standard
5337 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5338 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5339 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5340 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5343 \begin_layout Standard
5345 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5346 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5347 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5348 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5353 \begin_inset space ~
5359 This will insert a box labeled
5360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5364 \begin_inset space ~
5368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5371 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5372 This also works for captions inside floats.
5373 There can only be one short title per title.
5376 \begin_layout Standard
5377 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5384 \begin_layout Standard
5385 The following information applies to all section headings:
5388 \begin_layout Itemize
5389 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5392 \begin_layout Itemize
5393 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5396 \begin_layout Itemize
5397 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5400 \begin_layout Itemize
5401 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5404 \begin_layout Subsection
5408 \begin_layout Standard
5410 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5424 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5425 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5426 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5427 the text they contain.
5428 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5436 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5439 \begin_layout Standard
5440 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5449 when you start a new paragraph.
5450 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5454 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5455 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5456 have to change back to the
5460 environment yourself.
5463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5472 \begin_inset Index idx
5475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5484 \begin_layout Standard
5485 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5486 time for the differences.
5495 are identical except for one difference:
5499 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5508 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5511 \begin_layout Standard
5512 Here's an example of the
5525 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5527 See – no indentation!
5531 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5532 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5533 the other paragraph.
5536 \begin_layout Standard
5537 Here's another example, this time in the
5544 \begin_layout Quotation
5550 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5551 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5552 the first line, then
5556 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5560 you were quoting other text.
5563 \begin_layout Quotation
5564 Here's a new paragraph.
5565 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5566 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5569 \begin_layout Standard
5570 As the examples show,
5574 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5575 They should put quotes in the
5580 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5584 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5587 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5589 \begin_inset Index idx
5592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5599 \begin_inset Index idx
5602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5618 \begin_layout Standard
5623 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5629 \begin_inset Newline newline
5632 Which I did not rehearse!
5636 It could be much worse.
5637 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5639 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5640 indented a bit more than the first.
5641 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5647 \begin_inset Newline newline
5650 And make things look fine
5651 \begin_inset Newline newline
5657 arg "newline-insert newline"
5663 \begin_layout Standard
5668 does not indent both margins.
5669 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5670 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Subsection
5681 \begin_inset Index idx
5684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5700 \begin_layout Standard
5702 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5712 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5713 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5722 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5723 lets you provide your own label.
5724 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5725 describing some general features of all four of them.
5728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5732 \begin_layout Standard
5733 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5735 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5736 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5745 reset the environment to
5749 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5750 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5751 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5755 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5759 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5766 \begin_layout Standard
5767 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5768 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5769 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5771 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5772 you read all of section
5773 \begin_inset space ~
5777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5779 reference "sec:Nesting"
5786 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5788 \begin_inset Index idx
5791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5807 \begin_layout Standard
5808 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5812 paragraph environment.
5813 It has the following properties:
5816 \begin_layout Itemize
5817 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5821 \begin_layout Itemize
5823 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5826 \begin_layout Itemize
5827 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5831 \begin_layout Itemize
5832 The items can have any length.
5834 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5835 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5847 environment inside another
5851 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5855 \begin_layout Itemize
5856 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5861 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5864 \begin_layout Itemize
5866 \begin_inset space ~
5870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5872 reference "sec:Nesting"
5876 for a full explanation of nesting.
5880 \begin_layout Standard
5881 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5890 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5893 \begin_layout Standard
5894 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5895 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5898 \begin_layout Itemize
5899 The label for the first level
5903 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5907 \begin_layout Itemize
5908 The label for the second level is a dash.
5912 \begin_layout Itemize
5913 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5917 \begin_layout Itemize
5918 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5922 \begin_layout Itemize
5923 Back out to the third level.
5927 \begin_layout Itemize
5928 Back to the second level.
5932 \begin_layout Itemize
5933 Back to the outermost level.
5936 \begin_layout Standard
5937 These are the default labels for an
5942 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5947 dialog in the submenu
5952 \begin_inset Index idx
5955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5961 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5965 \begin_layout Standard
5966 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5967 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5969 \begin_inset space ~
5973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5975 reference "sec:Nesting"
5982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5984 \begin_inset Index idx
5987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5996 name "sec:Enumerate"
6003 \begin_layout Standard
6008 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6009 It has these properties:
6012 \begin_layout Enumerate
6013 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6017 \begin_layout Enumerate
6018 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6022 \begin_layout Enumerate
6024 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6032 environment resets the counter to one.
6035 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6050 Items can have any length.
6053 \begin_layout Enumerate
6054 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6057 \begin_layout Enumerate
6058 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6061 \begin_layout Enumerate
6062 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6066 \begin_layout Standard
6075 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6077 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6078 labels the four different levels in an
6085 \begin_layout Enumerate
6086 The first level of an
6090 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6094 \begin_layout Enumerate
6095 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6099 \begin_layout Enumerate
6100 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6104 \begin_layout Enumerate
6105 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6108 \begin_layout Enumerate
6109 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6114 \begin_layout Enumerate
6115 Back to the third level
6119 \begin_layout Enumerate
6120 Back to the second level.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Back to the outermost level.
6128 \begin_layout Standard
6129 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6133 environment, see section
6134 \begin_inset space ~
6138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6140 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6145 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6149 \begin_layout Standard
6150 There is more to nesting
6154 environments than we've stated here.
6155 You should read section
6156 \begin_inset space ~
6160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6162 reference "sec:Nesting"
6166 to learn more about nesting.
6169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6171 \begin_inset Index idx
6174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6183 \begin_layout Standard
6184 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6188 list has no fixed label.
6189 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6198 of the first line as the label.
6202 \begin_layout Description
6203 Example: This is an example of the
6210 \begin_layout Standard
6212 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6216 \begin_layout Standard
6218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6225 it is meant that the first usage of the
6229 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6231 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6239 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6245 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6247 \begin_inset space ~
6253 \begin_inset space ~
6257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6259 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6263 for more information.) Here is an example:
6266 \begin_layout Description
6268 \begin_inset space ~
6271 Example: This one shows how to use a
6274 \begin_inset space ~
6286 \begin_layout Description
6287 Usage: You should use the
6291 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6292 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6294 It's not a good idea to use a
6298 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6299 You're better off using
6311 paragraphs into them.
6314 \begin_layout Description
6315 Nesting: You can nest
6319 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6323 \begin_layout Standard
6324 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6325 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6326 them from the first line.
6329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6331 \begin_inset Index idx
6334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6343 \begin_layout Standard
6348 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6349 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6353 \begin_layout Standard
6362 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6364 Here are its properties:
6367 \begin_layout Labeling
6368 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6370 \begin_inset space ~
6373 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6382 of each line as the item label.
6387 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6388 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6389 space as described above.
6392 \begin_layout Labeling
6393 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6394 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6395 uses different margins for the item label and the
6396 body of the item text.
6397 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6398 label width plus a little extra space.
6402 \begin_layout Labeling
6403 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6405 \begin_inset space ~
6408 width \SpecialChar LyX
6409 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6410 If the label width is larger, the label
6411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6418 into the first line.
6419 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6420 margin of the rest of the item text.
6423 \begin_layout Labeling
6424 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6426 \begin_inset space ~
6429 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6434 environment has the same left margin.
6435 \begin_inset Newline newline
6438 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6441 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6443 \begin_inset space ~
6448 dialog (toolbar button
6451 arg "layout-paragraph"
6458 \begin_inset space ~
6463 determines the default label width.
6464 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6473 multiple times instead.
6474 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6484 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6487 \begin_inset space ~
6492 every time you alter a label in a
6497 \begin_inset Newline newline
6500 The predefined default width is the length of
6501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6509 \begin_inset space ~
6515 \begin_layout Standard
6520 list the same way as the
6524 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6530 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6534 \begin_layout Standard
6539 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6540 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6542 \begin_inset space ~
6546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6548 reference "sec:Nesting"
6552 to learn about nesting.
6555 \begin_layout Standard
6556 There is yet another feature of the
6560 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6561 left-justifies the item labels by
6563 You can use additional
6567 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6568 justifies the item label.
6573 are documented in section
6574 \begin_inset space ~
6578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6580 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6585 Here are some examples:
6588 \begin_layout Labeling
6589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6590 Left The default for
6597 \begin_layout Labeling
6598 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6599 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6606 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6609 \begin_layout Labeling
6610 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6611 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6625 \begin_layout Subsection
6627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6629 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6634 \begin_inset Index idx
6637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6646 \begin_layout Standard
6647 The features described in this section require that the module
6649 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6651 is loaded in the document settings.
6652 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6658 \begin_inset Index idx
6661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 -packages ! enumitem
6671 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6672 Custom Enumerate Lists
6673 \begin_inset Index idx
6676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6677 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6685 \begin_layout Standard
6687 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6693 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6694 There you add the command
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6705 \begin_layout Standard
6717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6718 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6719 Code, look at section
6720 \begin_inset space ~
6724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6726 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6739 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6746 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6747 For capital Roman numerals replace
6759 in the command above.
6760 For Arabic numerals use
6768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6775 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6790 \begin_layout Standard
6792 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6800 You can only number 26
6801 \begin_inset space ~
6804 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6812 \begin_layout Standard
6813 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6814 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6817 \begin_layout Standard
6818 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6821 \begin_layout Enumerate
6822 \begin_inset Argument 1
6825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6851 \begin_layout Enumerate
6852 \begin_inset Argument 1
6855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6878 \begin_layout Enumerate
6883 \begin_layout Enumerate
6884 \begin_inset Argument 1
6887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6911 \begin_layout Enumerate
6912 \begin_inset Argument 1
6915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6941 \begin_layout Standard
6942 For this list these commands were used:
6945 \begin_layout Standard
6956 \begin_inset Newline newline
6964 \begin_inset Newline newline
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6982 \begin_layout Standard
6989 makes the label emphasized and
6998 \begin_layout Standard
6999 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7007 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7008 lists until you change the definition.
7016 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7018 \begin_inset Index idx
7021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7022 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7030 \begin_layout Standard
7031 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7034 \begin_layout Enumerate
7035 \begin_inset Argument 1
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7057 \begin_inset Note Note
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7061 goes back to default numbering
7069 \begin_layout Enumerate
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7077 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7081 \begin_layout Standard
7082 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7087 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7088 to indicate that it is a resumed
7089 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7090 , but in the output.
7093 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7102 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7111 \begin_layout Standard
7112 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7114 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7115 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7116 of a normal enumeration.
7117 There, insert the command
7120 \begin_layout Standard
7126 \begin_layout Standard
7131 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7135 \begin_layout Enumerate
7139 \begin_layout Enumerate
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7144 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7147 \begin_layout Enumerate
7148 \begin_inset Argument 1
7151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7167 This enumeration starts at 4
7170 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7172 \begin_inset Index idx
7175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 \begin_layout Standard
7185 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7187 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7190 \begin_layout Itemize
7194 \begin_layout Itemize
7195 with standard spacing
7198 \begin_layout Standard
7199 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7201 Add there the command
7205 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7208 \begin_layout Itemize
7209 \begin_inset Argument 1
7212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7231 \begin_layout Itemize
7235 \begin_layout Itemize
7239 \begin_layout Standard
7240 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7247 \begin_inset Index idx
7250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7252 -packages ! enumitem
7258 For more information see its documentation,
7259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7268 \begin_layout Standard
7269 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7271 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7272 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7276 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7279 \begin_layout Enumerate
7280 \begin_inset Argument 1
7283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7291 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7304 \begin_layout Enumerate
7305 with negative indentation
7308 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7309 Further Customization
7310 \begin_inset Index idx
7313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7314 Lists ! Customization
7322 \begin_layout Standard
7323 You can also change the style of description lists.
7327 \begin_layout Standard
7333 \begin_layout Standard
7334 changes the description label font, the command
7337 \begin_layout Standard
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7344 sets the list style.
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7348 An example where the command
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7356 itshape, style=nextline
7359 \begin_layout Standard
7363 \begin_layout Description
7365 \begin_inset space ~
7369 \begin_inset Argument 1
7372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7378 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7380 itshape, style=nextline
7390 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7391 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7395 \begin_layout Description
7397 \begin_inset space ~
7400 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7401 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7402 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7405 \begin_layout Standard
7406 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7412 \begin_inset Index idx
7415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7417 -packages ! enumitem
7423 For more information see its documentation
7424 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7433 \begin_layout Subsection
7435 \begin_inset Index idx
7438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7447 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7449 \begin_inset space ~
7452 Address: An Overview
7455 \begin_layout Standard
7456 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7457 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7465 \begin_inset space ~
7471 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7472 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7473 gags on the document.
7474 In contrast, you can use the
7481 \begin_inset space ~
7486 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7487 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7491 \begin_layout Standard
7492 Of course, you're not limited to using
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7508 \begin_inset space ~
7513 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7514 some European academic papers.
7517 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7521 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7528 \begin_layout Standard
7533 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7534 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7538 \begin_inset space ~
7543 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7544 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7545 Here's an example of each:
7548 \begin_layout Right Address
7550 \begin_inset Newline newline
7554 \begin_inset Newline newline
7558 \begin_inset Newline newline
7561 When is it? What is today?
7564 \begin_layout Standard
7568 \begin_inset space ~
7574 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7576 the largest block of text on a single line.
7577 Here's an example of the
7584 \begin_layout Address
7586 \begin_inset Newline newline
7589 Where do I send this
7590 \begin_inset Newline newline
7593 Your post office and country
7596 \begin_layout Standard
7597 As you can see, both
7604 \begin_inset space ~
7609 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7614 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7615 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7621 This makes sense, since
7629 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7630 Thus, you have to use
7637 arg "newline-insert newline"
7642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7643 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7645 \begin_inset space ~
7649 \begin_inset space ~
7654 ) to start a new line in an
7661 \begin_inset space ~
7669 \begin_layout Subsection
7673 \begin_layout Standard
7674 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7675 or list of references.
7677 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7680 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7682 \begin_inset Index idx
7685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7694 \begin_layout Standard
7699 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7700 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7701 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7702 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7716 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7717 The book document classes ignores the
7721 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7725 in a letter document class.
7728 \begin_layout Standard
7733 environment does several things for you.
7734 First, it puts the centered label
7735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7743 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7745 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7746 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7747 the subsequent text.
7748 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7750 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7754 \begin_layout Standard
7755 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7759 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7760 The new paragraph will still be in the
7765 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7766 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7769 \begin_layout Standard
7770 \begin_inset Float figure
7775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7777 \begin_inset Graphics
7778 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7786 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7791 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7812 \begin_layout Standard
7813 We would love to demonstrate the
7817 environment, but since this document is in the
7818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7825 class, we can't do this.
7826 We inserted it therefore as figure
7827 \begin_inset space ~
7831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7833 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7838 If you have never heard of an
7839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7846 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7849 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7851 \begin_inset Index idx
7854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7863 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7870 \begin_layout Standard
7875 environment is used to list references.
7876 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7877 only use it at the end of the document.
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7890 When you first open a
7894 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7895 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7911 depending on the document class.
7912 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7913 Each paragraph of the
7917 environment is a bibliography entry.
7922 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7923 Each new paragraph is still in the
7930 \begin_layout Standard
7931 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7932 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7934 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7936 handling, have a look at section
7937 \begin_inset space ~
7941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7943 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7950 \begin_layout Subsection
7951 Special Environments
7954 \begin_layout Standard
7956 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7957 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7965 \begin_inset Index idx
7968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7978 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7985 \begin_layout Standard
7991 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7993 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7998 key as a fixed whitespace.
8002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8015 \begin_inset space ~
8020 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8038 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8041 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8044 arg "newline-insert newline"
8061 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8062 So, when you finish using the
8067 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8068 Also, you can nest the
8073 environment inside of others.
8076 \begin_layout Standard
8077 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8080 \begin_layout Itemize
8084 arg "newline-insert newline"
8087 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8092 \begin_inset space \space{}
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8108 \begin_layout Itemize
8112 arg "newline-insert newline"
8122 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8128 \begin_layout Itemize
8129 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8130 You must put at least one
8134 in any line you want blank.
8135 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8139 \begin_layout Itemize
8140 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8144 since that will insert
8149 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8152 arg "self-insert \""
8158 \begin_layout Standard
8162 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8166 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8170 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8174 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8178 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8179 printf("Hello World!
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout Standard
8193 This is just the standard
8194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8205 \begin_layout Standard
8211 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8213 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8214 as if you used a typewriter.
8215 \begin_inset Index idx
8218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8219 Paragraph environments|)
8224 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8227 Program Code Listings
8232 \begin_inset space ~
8240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8244 \begin_inset Index idx
8247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8256 \begin_layout Standard
8261 environment is similar to the
8266 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8267 computer console text.
8272 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8286 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8287 you can have empty lines.
8300 \begin_layout Itemize
8301 have a certain language and a text style
8304 \begin_layout Itemize
8305 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8306 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8307 and \SpecialChar TeX
8311 \begin_layout Standard
8312 Because of these properties
8316 works like a typewriter.
8320 \begin_layout Verbatim
8325 \begin_layout Verbatim
8329 The following 2 lines are empty:
8332 \begin_layout Verbatim
8336 \begin_layout Verbatim
8340 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8347 \begin_layout Standard
8352 environment is identical to
8356 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8357 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8364 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8369 \begin_layout Section
8370 Nesting Environments
8371 \begin_inset Index idx
8374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8375 Nesting ! Environments
8381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8390 \begin_layout Subsection
8394 \begin_layout Standard
8396 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8398 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8400 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8402 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8414 \begin_layout Enumerate
8418 \begin_layout Enumerate
8423 \begin_layout Enumerate
8427 \begin_layout Enumerate
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8436 \begin_layout Standard
8437 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8438 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8440 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8442 \begin_inset space ~
8446 \begin_inset space ~
8454 \begin_inset space ~
8458 \begin_inset space ~
8463 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8465 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8468 arg "depth-increment"
8474 arg "depth-decrement"
8488 arg "depth-increment"
8494 arg "depth-decrement"
8498 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8499 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8503 \begin_layout Standard
8504 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8505 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8506 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8507 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8508 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8511 \begin_layout Standard
8512 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8514 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8516 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8519 \begin_layout Subsection
8520 What You Can and Can't Nest
8523 \begin_layout Standard
8524 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8525 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8528 \begin_layout Standard
8529 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8530 than a simple yes or no.
8531 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8534 \begin_layout Itemize
8535 Completely unnestable
8538 \begin_layout Itemize
8539 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8543 \begin_layout Itemize
8544 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8548 \begin_layout Standard
8549 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8550 environments have them:
8553 \begin_layout Description
8554 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8555 Can't nest into them.
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 \begin_layout Itemize
8571 \begin_layout Itemize
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Description
8592 \begin_inset space ~
8595 Nestable You can nest them.
8596 You can nest other things into them.
8600 \begin_layout Itemize
8606 \begin_layout Itemize
8612 \begin_layout Itemize
8618 \begin_layout Itemize
8624 \begin_layout Itemize
8630 \begin_layout Itemize
8636 \begin_layout Itemize
8642 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8662 \begin_layout Description
8663 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8664 You can't nest anything into them.
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8680 \begin_layout Itemize
8686 \begin_layout Itemize
8692 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8716 \begin_layout Itemize
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8750 \begin_inset space ~
8756 \begin_layout Itemize
8763 \begin_layout Standard
8764 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8772 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8782 \begin_inset space ~
8785 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8786 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8787 nested section headings violate this.
8795 \begin_layout Subsection
8796 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8797 \begin_inset Index idx
8800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8801 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8809 \begin_layout Standard
8810 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8811 affected by nesting anyhow.
8815 \begin_layout Itemize
8819 \begin_layout Itemize
8823 \begin_layout Itemize
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8829 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8837 Figures and tables in
8841 are not affected by this.
8846 Have a look at section
8847 \begin_inset space ~
8851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8853 reference "sec:Floats"
8857 for more information about
8864 \begin_layout Standard
8866 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8867 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8871 \begin_layout Standard
8872 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8880 of its own, it behaves just like a
8881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8888 paragraph environment.
8889 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8893 \begin_layout Standard
8894 Here's an example with a table:
8897 \begin_layout Enumerate
8902 \begin_layout Enumerate
8903 This is (a) and it's nested.
8907 \begin_layout Standard
8908 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8914 \begin_layout Standard
8916 \begin_inset Tabular
8917 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8918 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8919 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8920 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9004 \begin_layout Standard
9005 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9012 \begin_layout Enumerate
9014 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9018 \begin_layout Enumerate
9022 \begin_layout Standard
9023 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9032 This is (a) and it's nested.
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9043 \begin_layout Standard
9045 \begin_inset Tabular
9046 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9047 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9048 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9049 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9133 \begin_layout Standard
9134 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9140 \begin_layout Enumerate
9147 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9150 \begin_layout Enumerate
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9155 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9159 \begin_layout Standard
9160 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9163 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9166 \begin_layout Enumerate
9171 \begin_layout Enumerate
9172 This is (a) and it's nested.
9175 \begin_layout Standard
9176 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9182 \begin_layout Standard
9184 \begin_inset Tabular
9185 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9186 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9273 \begin_layout Standard
9274 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9280 \begin_layout Enumerate
9282 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9289 \begin_layout Enumerate
9293 \begin_layout Standard
9294 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9300 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9301 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9305 \begin_layout Subsection
9306 Usage and General Features
9309 \begin_layout Standard
9310 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9311 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9320 is the innermost possible depth.
9321 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9324 \begin_layout Enumerate
9325 level #1 – outermost
9329 \begin_layout Enumerate
9334 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 \begin_layout Enumerate
9344 \begin_layout Itemize
9349 \begin_layout Itemize
9358 \begin_layout Standard
9359 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9360 both of them in the example.
9361 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9371 For example, if we tried to nest another
9376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9383 , we would get errors.
9386 \begin_layout Subsection
9388 \begin_inset Index idx
9391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9400 \begin_layout Standard
9401 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9402 We have several examples of nested environments.
9403 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9408 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9411 \begin_layout Labeling
9412 \labelwidthstring MMM
9413 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9422 \begin_layout Labeling
9423 \labelwidthstring MMM
9424 #2-a This is level #2.
9425 We created it by using
9428 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9434 arg "depth-increment"
9441 \begin_layout Labeling
9442 \labelwidthstring MMM
9443 #3-a This is level #3.
9444 This time, we just enter
9451 arg "depth-increment"
9455 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9459 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9465 arg "depth-increment"
9472 \begin_layout Standard
9477 environment, nested inside of
9478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9486 So, it's at level #4.
9487 We did this by entering
9490 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9496 arg "depth-increment"
9499 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9504 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9520 \begin_layout Standard
9525 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9528 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9534 \begin_layout Labeling
9535 \labelwidthstring MMM
9536 #4-a This is level #4.
9540 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9543 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9548 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9552 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9557 keep nesting things inside
9558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9569 \begin_layout Labeling
9570 \labelwidthstring MMM
9571 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9576 \begin_layout Labeling
9577 \labelwidthstring MMM
9578 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9579 and this is level #6.
9580 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9584 \begin_layout Labeling
9585 \labelwidthstring MMM
9586 #5-b Back to level #5.
9590 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9596 arg "depth-decrement"
9603 \begin_layout Labeling
9604 \labelwidthstring MMM
9608 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9614 arg "depth-decrement"
9617 , we're back at level #4.
9621 \begin_layout Labeling
9622 \labelwidthstring MMM
9623 #3-b Back to level #3.
9624 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9628 \begin_layout Labeling
9629 \labelwidthstring MMM
9630 #2-b Back to level #2.
9635 \begin_layout Labeling
9636 \labelwidthstring MMM
9637 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9638 After this sentence, we will enter
9642 and change the paragraph environment back to
9649 \begin_layout Standard
9650 We could have also used the
9666 environment in place of the
9671 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9674 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9675 Example 2: Inheritance
9678 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9679 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9682 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9691 arg "depth-increment"
9695 \begin_inset Newline newline
9698 which, we will change to the
9706 \begin_layout Enumerate
9711 environment, at level #2.
9714 \begin_layout Enumerate
9715 Notice how the nested
9719 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9723 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9727 \begin_layout Standard
9728 We ended this example by entering
9733 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9737 and reset the nesting depth by using
9740 arg "depth-decrement"
9746 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9747 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9756 \begin_inset Argument 1
9759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9760 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9768 \begin_layout Enumerate
9769 This is level #1, in an
9773 paragraph environment.
9774 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9778 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9789 arg "depth-increment"
9793 Now, what happens if we nest an
9797 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9798 label be? An asterisk?
9802 \begin_layout Itemize
9812 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9813 So, its label is a bullet.
9814 (We got here by using
9817 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9823 arg "depth-increment"
9826 , then changing the environment to
9834 \begin_layout Itemize
9835 Here's level #4, produced using
9838 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9844 arg "depth-increment"
9848 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9853 \begin_layout Enumerate
9856 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9861 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9865 , because we are in the
9873 environment (that is, it is an
9888 \begin_layout Enumerate
9893 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9894 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9898 \begin_layout Enumerate
9899 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9902 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9905 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9908 \begin_layout Enumerate
9912 arg "depth-decrement"
9915 to decrease the depth after the next
9918 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9925 \begin_layout Enumerate
9927 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9932 \begin_layout Enumerate
9934 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9935 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9939 \begin_layout Enumerate
9940 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9949 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9954 reset the counter for the label.
9958 \begin_layout Enumerate
9962 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9968 arg "depth-decrement"
9971 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9972 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9973 into the twofold-nested
9981 \begin_layout Enumerate
9982 The same thing happens if we do another
9985 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9991 arg "depth-decrement"
9994 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9997 \begin_layout Standard
9998 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10003 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10014 The number of other
10018 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10025 The same rule applies for the
10029 environment, as well.
10032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10033 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10036 \begin_layout Enumerate
10037 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10038 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10039 the same detail with how we did it.
10048 \begin_layout Standard
10056 arg "depth-increment"
10063 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10064 the example in parentheses someplace.
10065 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10066 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10067 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10071 \begin_layout Enumerate
10076 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10080 \begin_layout Verse
10081 Now we will add verse.
10082 \begin_inset Newline newline
10085 It will get much worse.
10086 \begin_inset Newline newline
10096 arg "depth-increment"
10106 \begin_layout Verse
10107 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10108 \begin_inset Newline newline
10111 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10112 \begin_inset Newline newline
10118 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10126 \begin_layout Verse
10127 Here comes a table:
10131 \begin_layout Standard
10132 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10138 \begin_layout Standard
10140 \begin_inset Tabular
10141 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10142 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10144 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10229 \begin_layout Verse
10233 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10243 arg "depth-increment"
10249 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10255 \begin_inset Newline newline
10263 arg "depth-decrement"
10270 \begin_layout Enumerate
10275 : level #1) This is another item.
10276 Note that selecting a
10280 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10281 3 times to put the table inside the
10289 \begin_layout Quotation
10290 We're now ending the
10294 list and changing to
10299 We're still at level #1.
10300 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10301 The next set of paragraphs is a
10302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10309 We will nest both the
10316 \begin_inset space ~
10321 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10325 for the letter body.
10329 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10332 to preserve the depth.
10333 Remember that you need to use
10336 arg "newline-insert newline"
10339 to create multiple lines inside the
10346 \begin_inset space ~
10356 \begin_layout Right Address
10358 \begin_inset Newline newline
10361 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10362 \begin_inset Newline newline
10368 \begin_layout Address
10370 \begin_inset space ~
10376 \begin_layout Quotation
10377 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10381 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10382 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10383 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10384 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10385 as soon as possible.
10386 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10389 \begin_layout Quotation
10390 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10391 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10392 with your order, along with payment.
10395 \begin_layout Quotation
10396 We thank you again for your patience.
10399 \begin_layout Address
10401 \begin_inset Newline newline
10408 \begin_layout Quotation
10409 That ends that example!
10412 \begin_layout Standard
10413 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10414 gives you a lot of power with just
10416 We could have easily nested an
10437 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10440 \begin_layout Subsection
10442 \begin_inset Index idx
10445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10446 Nesting ! Separation
10452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10454 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10461 \begin_layout Standard
10462 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10464 For example you need two different enumerations:
10467 \begin_layout Enumerate
10472 \begin_layout Enumerate
10477 \begin_layout Enumerate
10481 \begin_layout Standard
10482 \begin_inset Separator plain
10488 \begin_layout Itemize
10494 \begin_layout Standard
10495 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10501 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 \begin_layout Enumerate
10509 \begin_layout Enumerate
10513 \begin_layout Standard
10514 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10515 list item and use the menu
10517 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10518 Start New Environment
10521 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10522 ) and behind it the new list.
10525 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10526 Start New Parent Environment
10528 only appears if the item is nested.
10529 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10533 \begin_layout Standard
10534 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10535 (red arrow in LyX).
10536 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10537 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10540 \begin_layout Standard
10541 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10544 arg "paragraph-break"
10551 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10554 \begin_layout Section
10555 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10556 \begin_inset Index idx
10559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10568 \begin_layout Standard
10569 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10570 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10572 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10573 be broken at the end of a line.
10574 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10578 \begin_layout Subsection
10580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10582 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10587 \begin_inset Index idx
10590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10599 \begin_layout Standard
10600 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10601 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10602 ) not to break the line at
10604 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10607 \begin_layout Quote
10608 Further documentation is given in section
10609 \begin_inset Newline newline
10613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10615 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10623 \begin_layout Standard
10624 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10639 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10648 A protected space is set with
10650 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10651 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10653 \begin_inset space ~
10661 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10667 \begin_layout Subsection
10669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10671 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10676 \begin_inset Index idx
10679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10680 Spacing ! Horizontal
10688 \begin_layout Standard
10689 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10692 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10696 The length units are listed in Appendix
10697 \begin_inset space ~
10701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10703 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10714 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10719 \begin_inset Index idx
10722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10723 Spaces ! Inter-word
10731 \begin_layout Standard
10732 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10733 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10734 at the ends of sentences.
10735 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10736 automatically takes care about this.
10737 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10738 followed by a period; see section
10739 \begin_inset space ~
10743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10745 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10750 To insert a normal space, select
10752 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10753 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10755 \begin_inset space ~
10763 arg "space-insert normal"
10769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10773 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10778 \begin_inset Index idx
10781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10790 \begin_layout Standard
10792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10799 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10808 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10809 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10810 inside abbreviations:
10813 \begin_layout Quote
10815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10819 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10822 \begin_layout Standard
10823 or between values and units.
10824 Compare for example this:
10825 \begin_inset Newline newline
10829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10833 \begin_inset Newline newline
10836 10 kg (normal space
10839 \begin_layout Standard
10840 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10842 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10843 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10845 \begin_inset space ~
10853 arg "space-insert thin"
10859 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10863 \begin_layout Standard
10864 You can also insert the following space types:
10867 \begin_layout Description
10869 \begin_inset space ~
10873 \begin_inset space ~
10876 space A line with a
10877 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10881 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10885 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10888 negative thin space between the arrows.
10891 \begin_layout Description
10893 \begin_inset space ~
10897 \begin_inset space ~
10900 space A line with a
10901 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10905 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10909 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10912 negative medium space between the arrows.
10915 \begin_layout Description
10917 \begin_inset space ~
10921 \begin_inset space ~
10924 space A line with a
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10929 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10933 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10936 negative thick space between the arrows.
10939 \begin_layout Description
10941 \begin_inset space ~
10945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10949 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10953 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10957 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10961 \begin_inset space ~
10965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10968 em) space between the arrows.
10971 \begin_layout Description
10973 \begin_inset space ~
10977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10981 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10985 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10989 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10993 \begin_inset space ~
10997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11000 em) space between the arrows.
11003 \begin_layout Description
11005 \begin_inset space ~
11009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11013 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11017 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11021 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11025 \begin_inset space ~
11029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11032 em) space between the arrows.
11035 \begin_layout Description
11037 \begin_inset space ~
11041 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11045 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11050 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11057 cm space between the arrows.
11060 \begin_layout Standard
11062 \begin_inset space ~
11066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11068 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11072 lists the different space sizes.
11075 \begin_layout Standard
11076 \begin_inset Float table
11081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11082 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11087 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11091 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 \begin_inset Tabular
11102 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11103 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11104 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11105 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11221 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11378 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11380 \begin_inset Index idx
11383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11392 \begin_layout Standard
11393 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11394 feature for adding extra space
11395 in a uniform fashion.
11396 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11397 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11398 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11399 equally between themselves.
11402 \begin_layout Standard
11403 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11406 \begin_layout Quote
11408 This is on the left side
11409 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11412 This is on the right
11415 \begin_layout Quote
11418 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11422 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11428 \begin_layout Quote
11431 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11435 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11439 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11445 \begin_layout Standard
11446 That was an example in the
11452 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11456 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11460 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11463 is one in a standard paragraph.
11464 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11468 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11471 \begin_layout Standard
11472 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11475 \begin_inset space ~
11480 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11483 \begin_layout Standard
11485 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11495 \begin_layout Standard
11497 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11501 \begin_inset space ~
11507 \begin_layout Standard
11509 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11513 \begin_inset space ~
11519 \begin_layout Standard
11521 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11525 \begin_inset space ~
11531 \begin_layout Standard
11533 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11537 \begin_inset space ~
11543 \begin_layout Standard
11545 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11549 \begin_inset space ~
11555 \begin_layout Standard
11556 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11564 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11568 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11570 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11571 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11575 option in the space dialog.
11583 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11587 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11592 \begin_inset Index idx
11595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11604 \begin_layout Standard
11605 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11606 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11609 \begin_layout Standard
11610 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11613 What is correct English?:
11614 \begin_inset Newline newline
11618 \begin_inset Newline newline
11622 \begin_inset space ~
11625 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11626 \begin_inset Newline newline
11630 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11641 \begin_inset Newline newline
11645 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11656 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11662 \begin_layout Standard
11664 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11669 \begin_inset space ~
11673 \begin_inset space ~
11677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11681 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11688 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11694 \begin_inset space ~
11698 \begin_inset space ~
11702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11705 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11714 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11715 That is why it is named
11716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11724 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11725 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11729 \begin_layout Subsection
11731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11733 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11738 \begin_inset Index idx
11741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11750 \begin_layout Standard
11751 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11753 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11754 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11756 \begin_inset space ~
11762 There you find the following sizes:
11765 \begin_layout Standard
11778 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11779 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11784 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11786 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11787 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11789 \begin_inset space ~
11795 \begin_inset Index idx
11798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11799 Document ! Settings
11804 for the paragraph separation.
11805 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11816 \begin_layout Standard
11822 \begin_inset Index idx
11825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11831 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11832 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11837 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11838 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11847 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11856 s are described in section
11857 \begin_inset space ~
11861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11863 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11872 If there are several
11876 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11877 You can therefore use
11881 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11884 \begin_layout Standard
11889 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11890 \begin_inset space ~
11894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11896 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11903 \begin_layout Standard
11904 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11914 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11915 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11927 \begin_layout Subsection
11928 Paragraph Alignment
11929 \begin_inset Index idx
11932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11933 Paragraph ! Alignment
11941 \begin_layout Standard
11942 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11944 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11947 dialog (toolbar button
11950 arg "layout-paragraph"
11954 There are five possibilities:
11957 \begin_layout Itemize
11965 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11971 \begin_layout Itemize
11979 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11985 \begin_layout Itemize
11993 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11999 \begin_layout Itemize
12007 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12013 \begin_layout Itemize
12021 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12027 \begin_layout Standard
12028 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12029 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12030 the left and right margins.
12031 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12034 \begin_layout Standard
12036 This paragraph is right aligned,
12039 \begin_layout Standard
12041 this one is centered,
12044 \begin_layout Standard
12046 this one is left aligned.
12049 \begin_layout Subsection
12051 \begin_inset Index idx
12054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12055 Page breaks ! Forced
12061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12063 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12070 \begin_layout Standard
12071 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12072 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12073 force a page break where you want one.
12074 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12075 is good at page breaking.
12076 Only if you use a lot of
12080 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12081 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12084 \begin_layout Standard
12085 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12086 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12090 have to change the page breaking.
12093 \begin_layout Standard
12094 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12096 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12098 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12099 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12101 \begin_inset space ~
12107 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12109 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12110 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12112 \begin_inset space ~
12117 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12119 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12120 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12123 \begin_layout Standard
12124 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12125 at the top of a page.
12126 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12128 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12129 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12130 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12134 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12138 to learn more about
12145 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12149 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12154 \begin_inset Index idx
12157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12158 Page breaks ! Clear
12166 \begin_layout Standard
12167 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12168 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12169 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12170 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12171 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12174 \begin_layout Standard
12175 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12178 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12180 \begin_inset space ~
12186 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12188 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12189 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12191 \begin_inset space ~
12195 \begin_inset space ~
12200 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12201 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12204 \begin_layout Subsection
12206 \begin_inset Index idx
12209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12218 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12225 \begin_layout Standard
12226 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12228 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12231 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12233 \begin_inset space ~
12237 \begin_inset space ~
12245 arg "newline-insert newline"
12249 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12252 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12254 \begin_inset space ~
12258 \begin_inset space ~
12266 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12269 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12271 This is useful to avoid
12272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12279 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12282 \begin_layout Standard
12283 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12284 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12286 very good at line breaking.
12287 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12288 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12289 \begin_inset space ~
12293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12295 reference "sec:Quote"
12300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12302 reference "sec:Verse"
12307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12309 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12316 \begin_layout Subsection
12318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12320 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12325 \begin_inset Index idx
12328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12337 \begin_layout Standard
12339 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12350 \begin_layout Standard
12354 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12355 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 \begin_inset space ~
12362 you can insert horizontal lines.
12363 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12364 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12365 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12368 \begin_layout Standard
12370 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12381 \begin_layout Section
12382 Characters and Symbols
12385 \begin_layout Standard
12386 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12387 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12388 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12396 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12400 for information on how this is done.
12403 \begin_layout Standard
12404 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12409 dialog via the menu
12411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12412 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12418 \begin_layout Standard
12419 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12427 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12428 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12430 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12438 \begin_layout Section
12439 Fonts and Text Styles
12440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12442 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12449 \begin_layout Subsection
12451 \begin_inset Index idx
12454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12463 \begin_layout Standard
12464 There are two types of fonts:
12467 \begin_layout Description
12469 \begin_inset space ~
12473 \begin_inset Index idx
12476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12482 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12487 characters) in the font.
12488 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12489 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12490 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12491 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12492 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12493 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12494 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12495 \begin_inset Newline newline
12498 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12499 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12500 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12501 sizes than at small ones.
12502 \begin_inset Newline newline
12516 \begin_inset space ~
12524 \begin_layout Description
12526 \begin_inset space ~
12530 \begin_inset Index idx
12533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12539 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12540 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12541 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12542 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12543 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12544 image manipulation program.
12545 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12546 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12547 \begin_inset space ~
12550 pixels high up to 34
12551 \begin_inset space ~
12554 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12555 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12556 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12558 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12559 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12560 \begin_inset Newline newline
12563 Bitmap fonts are named
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12571 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12574 \begin_layout Standard
12575 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12576 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12577 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12578 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12579 use scalable fonts.
12582 \begin_layout Standard
12583 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12586 \begin_layout Standard
12587 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12588 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12589 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12590 font to emphasize text, you use an
12591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12599 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12601 In \SpecialChar LyX
12602 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12606 \begin_layout Subsection
12609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12611 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12618 \begin_layout Standard
12619 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12620 used its own fonts.
12621 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12622 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12625 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12626 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12627 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12628 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12629 to a word processor.
12630 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12631 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12632 files are very portable across
12633 different machines.
12634 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12635 has increased a lot
12636 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12639 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12641 \begin_inset space ~
12645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12647 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12652 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12653 code in the document
12654 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12657 \begin_layout Standard
12658 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12659 engines that are also able directly
12660 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12662 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12664 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12666 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12667 that is installed on your system.
12668 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12671 \begin_layout Standard
12672 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12680 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12681 es; so you might have to experiment.
12689 \begin_layout Subsection
12690 Document Font and Font size
12691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12693 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12698 \begin_inset Index idx
12701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12708 \begin_inset Index idx
12711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12720 \begin_layout Standard
12721 You can set the document fonts in the
12723 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12727 \begin_inset Index idx
12730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12731 Document ! Settings
12741 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12742 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12745 \begin_inset space ~
12754 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12756 \begin_inset space ~
12759 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12762 \begin_layout Standard
12767 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12768 This requires that you use
12780 as the output format, i.
12781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12785 \begin_inset space \space{}
12788 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12789 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12790 installed (see section
12791 \begin_inset space ~
12795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12797 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12802 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12804 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12805 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12807 \begin_inset space ~
12810 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12811 cannot determine the family.
12812 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12813 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12816 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12819 \begin_layout Standard
12820 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12821 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12826 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12832 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12833 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12841 \begin_inset space ~
12847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12860 European Computer Modern
12863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12870 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12873 \begin_layout Standard
12882 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12883 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12888 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12891 \begin_inset space ~
12896 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12902 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12903 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12906 \begin_layout Itemize
12910 \begin_inset space ~
12915 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12928 \begin_inset space ~
12933 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12934 community in order to replace
12938 as the default font.
12939 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12940 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12943 \begin_inset space ~
12956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12957 One difference is improved kerning.
12965 \begin_layout Itemize
12969 \begin_inset space ~
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12978 fonts in (the rare) case that
12981 \begin_inset space ~
12986 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13001 Virtual means that it
13002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13013 -glyphs from other fonts.
13014 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13036 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13042 \begin_inset Index idx
13045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13047 -packages ! aeguill
13052 with the document preamble line
13053 \begin_inset Newline newline
13060 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13061 \begin_inset Newline newline
13066 will fix the guillemet problem.
13071 and that accented characters are not
13075 glyph, but built of
13079 characters, the accent and the letter.
13080 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13086 If you search for example for the French word
13087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13094 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13103 and not for the glyph
13104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13108 \begin_inset space ~
13112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13118 \begin_layout Itemize
13119 If you do not like the look of
13127 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13138 \begin_inset space ~
13148 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13149 \begin_inset space ~
13152 serif and typewriter fonts,
13156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13157 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13164 \begin_inset space ~
13173 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13178 \begin_inset space \space{}
13186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13190 \begin_inset space \space{}
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13204 \begin_inset space ~
13214 but you can also select your own.
13215 \begin_inset Newline newline
13218 The differences between roman,
13221 \begin_inset space ~
13230 fonts are explained in section
13231 \begin_inset space ~
13235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13237 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13242 \begin_inset Newline newline
13248 \begin_inset space ~
13253 was originally designed for newspapers.
13254 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13255 into the small newspaper columns.
13259 \begin_inset space ~
13264 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13267 \begin_layout Standard
13268 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13281 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13286 depends on the class you are using.
13287 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13290 \begin_layout Standard
13291 Note that the font size is the
13296 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13297 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13298 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13299 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13302 \begin_inset space ~
13308 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13309 \begin_inset space ~
13313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13315 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13322 \begin_layout Standard
13326 \begin_inset space ~
13331 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13333 \begin_inset space ~
13336 serif or typewriter.
13341 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13351 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13354 \begin_layout Standard
13359 LaTeX font encoding
13361 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13362 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13368 \begin_inset Index idx
13371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13373 -packages ! fontenc
13379 \begin_inset space ~
13383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13385 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13390 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13391 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13398 \begin_layout Standard
13399 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13401 Use Old Style Figures
13405 Use True Small Caps
13408 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13411 Use Old Style Figures
13413 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13415 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13423 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13427 Use True Small Caps
13429 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13430 of scaled capitals.
13431 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13432 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13435 \begin_layout Standard
13440 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13441 a font to display the script characters.
13445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13446 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13452 \begin_inset Index idx
13455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13462 So this has no effect for the document language
13476 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13480 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13488 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13493 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13494 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13496 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13498 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13501 dialog, see section
13502 \begin_inset space ~
13506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13508 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13520 \begin_layout Subsection
13524 \begin_layout Standard
13525 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13526 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13528 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13529 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13530 choose a math font in the dialog
13532 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13536 \begin_inset Index idx
13539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13540 Document ! Settings
13546 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13547 automatically selects a math font.
13548 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13549 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13558 \begin_inset space ~
13564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13569 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13570 document font is available.
13573 \begin_layout Standard
13574 Note that the math font will not be used for
13578 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13584 or by the insertion of the command
13591 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13592 \begin_inset space ~
13596 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13597 while the math characters do not.
13599 \begin_inset space ~
13602 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13605 \begin_inset space ~
13613 \begin_inset space ~
13618 in the document font settings.
13621 \begin_layout Standard
13622 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13623 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13624 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13625 font (in most cases
13626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13632 \begin_inset space ~
13638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13641 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13642 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13650 \begin_inset space ~
13656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13662 \begin_layout Subsection
13663 Using Different Character Styles
13664 \begin_inset Index idx
13667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13674 \begin_inset Index idx
13677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13686 \begin_layout Standard
13687 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13688 automatically changes the character style for certain
13689 paragraph environments.
13691 supports two character styles,
13700 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13704 \begin_layout Standard
13709 style, do one of the following:
13712 \begin_layout Itemize
13713 click on the toolbar button
13722 \begin_layout Itemize
13723 use the key binding
13732 \begin_layout Standard
13733 These commands are all toggles.
13738 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13741 \begin_layout Standard
13742 One typically uses the
13746 style for proper names.
13748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13755 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13763 \begin_layout Standard
13764 A more widely used character style is the
13769 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13776 \begin_layout Itemize
13777 clicking on the toolbar button
13786 \begin_layout Itemize
13787 using the keybindings
13796 \begin_layout Standard
13801 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13803 use a different font.
13806 \begin_layout Standard
13807 We've been using the
13811 style all over the place in this document.
13812 Here's one more example:
13815 \begin_layout Quotation
13818 Do not overuse character styles!
13821 \begin_layout Standard
13822 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13823 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13824 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13825 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13829 \begin_layout Standard
13830 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13838 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13840 \begin_inset space ~
13843 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13849 arg "dialog-show character"
13855 \begin_layout Subsection
13856 Fine-Tuning with the
13861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13863 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13868 \begin_inset Index idx
13871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13880 \begin_layout Standard
13881 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13883 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13884 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13885 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13886 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13887 from ordinary dialog.
13890 \begin_layout Standard
13891 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13892 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13893 \begin_inset Newline newline
13896 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13897 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13900 \begin_layout Standard
13901 To use custom character styles, open the
13903 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13905 \begin_inset space ~
13908 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13911 dialog or press the toolbar button
13914 arg "dialog-show character"
13918 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13919 font property that you can choose.
13920 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13923 \begin_inset space ~
13928 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13933 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13934 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13935 environments all at once.
13938 \begin_layout Standard
13939 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13942 \begin_inset space ~
13954 \begin_layout Labeling
13955 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13969 The possible options are:
13973 \begin_layout Labeling
13974 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13979 This is the Roman font family.
13980 Normally a serif font.
13981 It's also the default family.
13991 \begin_layout Labeling
13992 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13996 \begin_inset space ~
14003 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14015 \begin_layout Labeling
14016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14023 This is the Typewriter font family.
14029 arg "font-typewriter"
14038 \begin_layout Labeling
14039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14044 This corresponds to the print weight.
14049 \begin_layout Labeling
14050 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14055 This is the Medium font series.
14056 It's also the default series.
14059 \begin_layout Labeling
14060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14067 This is the Bold font series.
14080 \begin_layout Labeling
14081 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14086 As the name implies.
14091 \begin_layout Labeling
14092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14097 This is the Upright font shape.
14098 It's also the default shape.
14101 \begin_layout Labeling
14102 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14116 s the Italic font shape
14122 \begin_layout Labeling
14123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14130 This is the Slanted font shape
14132 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14133 , this is different from italic).
14136 \begin_layout Labeling
14137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14141 \begin_inset space ~
14148 This is the Small caps font shape
14155 \begin_layout Labeling
14156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14161 Alters the text color.
14162 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14166 \begin_inset space ~
14171 , which means that the document default color set in
14173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14180 \begin_inset space ~
14185 is used, you can choose between
14262 \begin_inset Index idx
14265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14274 \begin_layout Labeling
14275 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14280 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14281 the language of the document.
14282 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14283 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14285 \begin_inset Newline newline
14288 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14290 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14291 When using the spell checking (see section
14292 \begin_inset space ~
14296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14298 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14302 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14305 \begin_layout Labeling
14306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14311 Alters the size of the font.
14312 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14313 proportional to the document font size.
14314 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14315 the details, but a general description of what
14321 \begin_layout Labeling
14322 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14343 arg "font-size tiny"
14349 \begin_layout Labeling
14350 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14371 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14377 \begin_layout Labeling
14378 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14399 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14405 \begin_layout Labeling
14406 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14427 arg "font-size small"
14433 \begin_layout Labeling
14434 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14448 It's also the default size.
14452 arg "font-size normal"
14458 \begin_layout Labeling
14459 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14480 arg "font-size large"
14486 \begin_layout Labeling
14487 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14508 arg "font-size larger"
14514 \begin_layout Labeling
14515 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14536 arg "font-size largest"
14542 \begin_layout Labeling
14543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14564 arg "font-size huge"
14570 \begin_layout Labeling
14571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14592 arg "font-size giant"
14598 \begin_layout Labeling
14599 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14604 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14624 arg "font-size increase"
14630 \begin_layout Labeling
14631 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14636 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14656 arg "font-size decrease"
14663 \begin_layout Standard
14668 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14669 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14671 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14672 — use those instead.
14673 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14676 \begin_layout Labeling
14677 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14682 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14687 \begin_layout Labeling
14688 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14695 This is text with emphasize on
14698 This might seem like the same as
14702 , but it is actually a bit different.
14708 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14710 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14713 \begin_layout Labeling
14714 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14721 This is text with Underbar on.
14727 arg "font-underline"
14733 \begin_inset Newline newline
14738 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14739 when you could not change fonts.
14740 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14741 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14742 because some people
14746 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14749 \begin_layout Labeling
14750 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14754 \begin_inset space ~
14761 This is text with Double underbar on.
14767 arg "font-underunderline"
14771 \begin_inset Newline newline
14774 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14775 about double underbar.
14778 \begin_layout Labeling
14779 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14783 \begin_inset space ~
14790 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14796 arg "font-underwave"
14800 \begin_inset Newline newline
14803 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14804 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14807 \begin_layout Labeling
14808 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14815 This is text with Strikeout on.
14821 arg "font-strikeout"
14825 \begin_inset Newline newline
14828 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14829 changed in the meantime.
14832 \begin_layout Labeling
14833 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14840 This is text with Noun on.
14847 , this is a logical attribute.
14848 Normally it's equivalent to
14851 \begin_inset space ~
14860 \begin_layout Standard
14861 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14862 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14864 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14866 \begin_inset space ~
14869 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14875 arg "dialog-show character"
14878 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14879 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14882 arg "textstyle-apply"
14886 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14890 \begin_layout Standard
14891 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14898 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14899 (suppose you just set the shape to
14900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14918 \begin_inset space ~
14930 \begin_layout Standard
14931 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14939 \begin_inset space ~
14951 \begin_layout Itemize
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14964 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14982 \begin_inset Newline newline
14986 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15000 \begin_inset Note Note
15003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15004 For more on phantoms see section
15005 \begin_inset space ~
15009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15011 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15021 \begin_inset Newline newline
15027 \begin_layout Itemize
15032 fonts use characters with serifs.
15033 These are the small
15034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15041 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15042 The following example shows the difference:
15043 \begin_inset Newline newline
15047 \begin_inset Newline newline
15052 text without serifs
15055 \begin_inset Newline newline
15058 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15059 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15066 \begin_layout Itemize
15071 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15072 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15073 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15076 \begin_layout Standard
15077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15084 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15085 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15088 \begin_inset space ~
15093 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15094 the property to be removed.
15095 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15096 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15097 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15115 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15116 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15124 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15128 \begin_inset space ~
15133 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15144 If you, for example, set
15145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15163 \begin_inset space ~
15168 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15177 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15180 \begin_layout Standard
15181 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15182 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15185 \begin_layout Section
15186 Printing and Previewing
15189 \begin_layout Subsection
15193 \begin_layout Standard
15194 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15195 using \SpecialChar LyX
15196 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15197 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15198 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15199 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15201 Additional Features
15206 \begin_layout Standard
15208 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15211 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15212 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15213 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15216 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15217 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15218 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15219 to turn your writing into printable output.
15220 This happens in two stages:
15223 \begin_layout Enumerate
15224 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15225 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15227 a file with the extension,
15228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15242 \begin_layout Enumerate
15243 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15244 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15245 to use the commands in the
15249 file to produce printable output.
15252 \begin_layout Subsection
15253 Output file formats
15254 \begin_inset Index idx
15257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15266 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15273 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15274 Simple text (ASCII)
15275 \begin_inset Index idx
15278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15279 File formats ! ASCII
15287 \begin_layout Standard
15288 This file type has the extension
15289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15301 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15305 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15312 \begin_layout Standard
15313 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15315 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15316 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15318 \begin_inset space ~
15324 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15325 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15326 bibliography (section
15327 \begin_inset space ~
15331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15333 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15338 If your document includes such material, use
15340 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15341 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15343 \begin_inset space ~
15347 \begin_inset space ~
15351 \begin_inset space ~
15359 \begin_inset space ~
15363 \begin_inset space ~
15369 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15370 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15376 \begin_inset Index idx
15379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15380 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15389 \begin_layout Standard
15390 This file type has the extension
15391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15402 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15405 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15406 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15407 -Errors or to process it manually
15408 with console commands.
15409 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15410 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15411 's temporary directory whenever you
15412 view or export your document.
15415 \begin_layout Standard
15416 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15417 -file using the menu
15419 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15420 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15424 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15425 export variants are explained in section
15426 \begin_inset space ~
15430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15432 reference "subsec:Export"
15439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15441 \begin_inset Index idx
15444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15453 \begin_layout Standard
15454 This file type has the extension
15455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15475 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15476 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15477 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15481 \begin_layout Standard
15482 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15483 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15484 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15485 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15486 when you view the DVI.
15487 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15490 \begin_layout Standard
15491 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15493 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15494 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15499 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15500 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15502 \begin_inset space ~
15508 The latter option uses the program
15510 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15516 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15519 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15520 font access (see section
15521 \begin_inset space ~
15525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15527 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15532 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15533 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15540 \begin_inset Index idx
15543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15544 File formats ! PostScript
15552 \begin_layout Standard
15553 This file type has the extension
15554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15566 PostScript was developed by the company
15570 as a printer language.
15571 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15573 PostScript can be seen as a
15574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15577 programming language
15578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15581 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15586 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15593 \begin_inset Index idx
15596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15598 -packages ! pstricks
15608 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15611 \begin_layout Standard
15612 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15616 Encapsulated PostScript
15617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15620 (EPS, file extension
15621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15633 As \SpecialChar LyX
15634 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15635 convert them in the background to EPS.
15636 If, for example, you have 50
15637 \begin_inset space ~
15640 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15642 \begin_inset space ~
15645 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15646 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15648 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15649 EPS to avoid this problem.
15652 \begin_layout Standard
15653 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15655 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15656 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15662 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15664 \begin_inset Index idx
15667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15674 \begin_inset Index idx
15677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15686 \begin_layout Standard
15687 This file type has the extension
15688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15704 Portable Document Format
15705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15712 was derived from PostScript.
15713 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15722 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15723 looks exactly the same.
15726 \begin_layout Standard
15727 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15731 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15735 (JPG, file extension
15736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15763 Portable Network Graphics
15764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15767 (PNG, file extension
15768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15780 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15781 converts them in the
15782 background to one of these formats.
15783 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15784 will slow down your workflow.
15785 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15788 \begin_layout Standard
15789 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15791 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15797 \begin_layout Description
15799 \begin_inset space ~
15802 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15806 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15809 \begin_layout Description
15811 \begin_inset space ~
15818 ) This uses the program
15820 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15823 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15826 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15829 is a new engine, derived from
15833 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15834 access (see section
15835 \begin_inset space ~
15839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15841 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15846 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15847 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15852 \begin_layout Description
15854 \begin_inset space ~
15861 ) This uses the program
15866 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15872 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15873 font access (see section
15874 \begin_inset space ~
15878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15880 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15885 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15886 vertically written Japanese.
15889 \begin_layout Description
15891 \begin_inset space ~
15894 (cropped) This is the same as
15897 \begin_inset space ~
15902 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15903 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15904 to generate good-looking
15905 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15908 \begin_layout Description
15910 \begin_inset space ~
15913 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15917 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15921 \begin_layout Description
15923 \begin_inset space ~
15926 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15930 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15931 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15935 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15936 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15939 \begin_layout Standard
15943 \begin_inset space ~
15952 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15953 works without problems.
15954 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15955 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15959 \begin_inset space ~
15967 \begin_inset space ~
15972 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15982 \begin_inset Index idx
15985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15986 FileFormats ! XHTML
15992 \begin_inset Index idx
15995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16004 \begin_layout Standard
16005 This file type has the extension
16006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16018 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16019 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16020 When \SpecialChar LyX
16021 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16022 suitable for the purpose.
16023 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16026 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16029 between different formats, which are described in section
16031 Math Output in XHTML
16036 \begin_inset space ~
16044 \begin_layout Standard
16045 XHTML output remains
16046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16053 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16054 features are supported yet.
16058 and the World Wide Web
16062 Additional Features
16064 manual, for more information.
16067 \begin_layout Standard
16068 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16070 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16071 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16077 \begin_layout Subsection
16079 \begin_inset Index idx
16082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16091 \begin_layout Standard
16092 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16093 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16102 or use the toolbar button
16109 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16110 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16111 \begin_inset space ~
16115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16117 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16121 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16123 \begin_inset space ~
16127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16129 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16134 Further output formats can be selected via
16136 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16137 View (Other Formats)
16139 or the toolbar button
16148 \begin_layout Standard
16149 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16150 viewer window using the menu
16152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16157 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16158 Update (Other Formats)
16163 \begin_layout Standard
16164 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16167 To have a real output, export your document.
16170 \begin_layout Section
16171 A few Words about Typography
16172 \begin_inset Index idx
16175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16184 \begin_layout Subsection
16185 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16186 \begin_inset Index idx
16189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16196 \begin_inset Index idx
16199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16208 \begin_layout Standard
16209 In \SpecialChar LyX
16211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16222 character comes in four lengths: the
16234 , and the minus sign:
16235 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16241 \begin_layout Standard
16242 \begin_inset Tabular
16243 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16244 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16245 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16246 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16247 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16248 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16277 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16317 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16344 \begin_inset space ~
16347 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16354 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16379 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16381 \begin_inset space ~
16384 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16405 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16439 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16445 \begin_layout Standard
16446 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16458 character multiple times in a row.
16459 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16460 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16493 \begin_layout Standard
16494 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16495 math mode and has a length of its own.
16496 Here are some examples:
16499 \begin_layout Enumerate
16500 line- and page-breaks
16501 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16511 \begin_layout Enumerate
16513 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16523 \begin_layout Enumerate
16524 Oh — there's a dash.
16525 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16535 \begin_layout Enumerate
16536 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16540 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16550 \begin_layout Subsection
16552 \begin_inset Index idx
16555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16564 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16571 \begin_layout Standard
16572 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16573 but automatically in the output.
16574 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16580 \begin_inset Index idx
16583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16590 following the rules of the document language.
16593 \begin_layout Standard
16595 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16599 font and with unusual constructs, like
16600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16608 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16609 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16610 This is done with the menu
16612 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16613 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16615 \begin_inset space ~
16621 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16623 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16627 \begin_layout Standard
16628 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16629 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16640 would then see the hyphen
16641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16648 as a hyphenation possibility.
16649 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16650 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16651 as described in section
16653 Prevent Hyphenation
16658 \begin_inset space ~
16666 \begin_layout Subsection
16668 \begin_inset Index idx
16671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16680 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16681 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16684 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16691 \begin_layout Standard
16692 When \SpecialChar LyX
16693 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16694 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16696 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16702 appropriate amount of space.
16703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16706 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16708 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16709 gets after another word.
16712 \begin_layout Standard
16713 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16714 not work in all cases.
16716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16727 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16728 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16731 \begin_layout Standard
16732 Here are some examples of
16736 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16739 \begin_layout Itemize
16744 \begin_layout Itemize
16749 \begin_layout Standard
16750 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16753 \begin_layout Itemize
16755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16759 this is too much space!
16762 \begin_layout Itemize
16767 \begin_layout Standard
16768 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16771 \begin_layout Standard
16772 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16775 \begin_layout Enumerate
16779 \begin_inset space ~
16784 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16785 \begin_inset space ~
16789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16791 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16796 \begin_inset Index idx
16799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16800 Spaces ! inter-word
16808 \begin_layout Enumerate
16812 \begin_inset space ~
16817 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16818 \begin_inset space ~
16822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16824 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16829 \begin_inset Index idx
16832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16841 \begin_layout Enumerate
16845 \begin_inset space ~
16849 \begin_inset space ~
16853 \begin_inset space ~
16860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16862 \begin_inset space ~
16867 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16868 This function is also bound to
16871 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16877 \begin_layout Standard
16878 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16881 \begin_layout Itemize
16883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16887 \begin_inset space \space{}
16890 this is too much space!
16893 \begin_layout Itemize
16894 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16898 \begin_layout Standard
16899 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16900 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16902 will take care of this.
16905 \begin_layout Standard
16906 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16910 \begin_inset space ~
16916 feature described in the section
16918 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16923 Additional Features
16928 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16930 \begin_inset Index idx
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16934 Typography ! Quotes
16940 \begin_inset Index idx
16943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16974 \begin_layout Standard
16976 usually sets quotes correctly.
16977 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16978 and use a closing quote at the end.
16980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16988 The keyboard character,
16992 , generates this automatically.
16995 \begin_layout Standard
16996 You can specify what character the
17000 key produces using the submenu
17006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17010 \begin_inset Index idx
17013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17014 Document ! Settings
17024 There are six choices:
17027 \begin_layout Labeling
17028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17051 \begin_layout Labeling
17052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17055 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17059 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17064 Use quotes like ”this”
17067 \begin_layout Labeling
17068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17071 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17075 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17081 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17085 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17091 \begin_layout Labeling
17092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17095 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17099 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17105 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17109 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17115 \begin_layout Labeling
17116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17119 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17123 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17129 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17133 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17139 \begin_layout Labeling
17140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17143 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17147 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17153 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17157 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17163 \begin_layout Standard
17164 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17167 arg "quote-insert single"
17173 \begin_layout Subsection
17175 \begin_inset Index idx
17178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17179 Typography ! Ligatures
17185 \begin_inset Index idx
17188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17219 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17226 \begin_layout Standard
17227 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17228 print them as single characters.
17229 These groups are known as
17234 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17235 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17237 Here are the standard ligatures:
17240 \begin_layout Itemize
17244 \begin_layout Itemize
17248 \begin_layout Itemize
17252 \begin_layout Itemize
17256 \begin_layout Itemize
17260 \begin_layout Standard
17261 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17264 \begin_layout Standard
17265 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17266 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17274 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17290 To break a ligature, use
17292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17293 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17295 \begin_inset space ~
17302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17313 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17330 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17338 \begin_layout Subsection
17340 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17342 \begin_inset Index idx
17345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17355 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17362 \begin_layout Standard
17365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17366 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17370 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17373 \begin_layout Description
17375 The name of the game.
17378 \begin_layout Description
17380 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17384 \begin_layout Description
17386 The \SpecialChar TeX
17387 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17391 \begin_layout Description
17392 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17393 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17397 \begin_layout Standard
17398 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17404 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17412 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17413 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17414 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17415 converges to the number
17416 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17419 : The actual version is
17420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17428 , the previous one was
17429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17440 \begin_layout Subsection
17442 \begin_inset Index idx
17445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17454 \begin_layout Standard
17455 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17456 space between two words.
17457 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17467 for units use the menu
17469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17470 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17472 \begin_inset space ~
17480 arg "space-insert thin"
17486 \begin_layout Standard
17487 Here is an example to show the differences:
17490 \begin_layout Standard
17491 \begin_inset Tabular
17492 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17493 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17494 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17495 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17502 \begin_inset space ~
17506 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17518 space between number and unit
17525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17534 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17546 half space between number and unit
17559 \begin_layout Subsection
17561 \begin_inset Index idx
17564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17565 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17573 \begin_layout Standard
17574 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17576 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17577 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17578 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17579 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17580 These bits of text became known as
17591 \begin_layout Standard
17592 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17593 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17594 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17595 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17596 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17597 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17598 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17599 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17600 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17601 \begin_inset Newline newline
17609 \begin_inset Newline newline
17617 \begin_inset Newline newline
17620 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17621 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17622 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17624 \begin_inset space ~
17628 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17630 key "latexcompanion"
17635 \begin_inset space ~
17639 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17645 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17646 's page break mechanism.
17649 \begin_layout Chapter
17650 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17653 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17660 \begin_layout Standard
17661 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17664 \begin_inset space ~
17670 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17673 \begin_layout Section
17675 \begin_inset Index idx
17678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17694 \begin_layout Standard
17696 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17699 \begin_layout Description
17702 \begin_inset space ~
17705 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17706 \begin_inset Newline newline
17710 \begin_inset Note Note
17713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17714 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17722 \begin_layout Description
17723 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17724 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17725 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17728 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17729 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17731 \begin_inset space ~
17737 \begin_inset Newline newline
17741 \begin_inset Note Comment
17744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17745 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17754 \begin_layout Description
17756 \begin_inset space ~
17759 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17760 set in the document settings under
17762 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17764 \begin_inset space ~
17770 \begin_inset Newline newline
17774 \begin_inset Newline newline
17778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17787 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17788 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17793 of a comment that appears in the output.
17799 \begin_inset Newline newline
17803 \begin_inset Newline newline
17806 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17809 \begin_layout Standard
17810 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17818 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17822 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17825 \begin_layout Section
17827 \begin_inset Index idx
17830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17839 name "sec:Footnotes"
17846 \begin_layout Standard
17848 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17854 or the toolbar button
17857 arg "footnote-insert"
17869 \begin_inset Graphics
17870 filename clipart/footnote.png
17879 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17880 's representation of your footnote.
17890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17909 label, the box will
17913 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17914 Clicking on the box label again will close
17927 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17928 and click on the footnote
17943 \begin_layout Standard
17944 Here is an example footnote:
17952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17953 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17961 \begin_layout Standard
17962 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17963 position where the footnote box is placed.
17964 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17965 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17966 according to the document class.
17968 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17969 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17975 ey are described in the
17978 \begin_inset space ~
17986 \begin_layout Section
17988 \begin_inset Index idx
17991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18000 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18007 \begin_layout Standard
18008 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18010 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18014 \begin_inset space ~
18019 or the toolbar button
18022 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18048 appearing within your text.
18049 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18050 's representation of your margin
18059 \begin_layout Standard
18060 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18064 \begin_inset Marginal
18067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18069 This is a marginal note.
18077 \begin_layout Standard
18078 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18079 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18080 pages, right on odd pages.
18083 \begin_layout Standard
18084 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18087 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_inset space ~
18103 \begin_layout Section
18104 Graphics and Images
18105 \begin_inset Index idx
18108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18115 \begin_inset Index idx
18118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18127 name "sec:Graphics"
18134 \begin_layout Standard
18135 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18136 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18139 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18148 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18151 \begin_layout Standard
18152 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18157 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18158 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18160 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18161 \begin_inset space ~
18165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18167 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18174 \begin_layout Standard
18179 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18180 of the image in the output.
18181 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18185 \begin_inset space ~
18189 \begin_inset space ~
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18202 \begin_inset space ~
18206 \begin_inset space ~
18211 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18212 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18220 \begin_layout Standard
18224 \begin_inset space ~
18228 \begin_inset space ~
18233 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18234 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18236 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18241 \begin_inset space ~
18246 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18247 with the image size is printed.
18250 \begin_layout Standard
18251 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18252 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18254 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18257 \begin_layout Standard
18259 \begin_inset Graphics
18260 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18268 \begin_layout Standard
18269 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18270 the image into a float, see section
18271 \begin_inset space ~
18275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18277 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18284 \begin_layout Subsection
18286 \begin_inset Index idx
18289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18298 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18305 \begin_layout Standard
18306 You can insert images in any known file format.
18307 But as we explained in section
18308 \begin_inset space ~
18312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18314 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18318 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18320 therefore uses the program
18324 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18325 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18326 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18327 \begin_inset space ~
18331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18333 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18340 \begin_layout Standard
18341 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18344 \begin_layout Description
18346 \begin_inset space ~
18349 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18350 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18351 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18355 Graphics Interchange Format
18356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18359 (GIF, file extension
18360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18372 \begin_inset Index idx
18375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18407 Portable Network Graphics
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18411 (PNG, file extension
18412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18424 \begin_inset Index idx
18427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18459 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18463 (JPG, file extension
18464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18488 \begin_inset Index idx
18491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18522 \begin_layout Description
18524 \begin_inset space ~
18527 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18529 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18530 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18531 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18532 \begin_inset Newline newline
18535 Scalable image formats can be
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18539 Scalable Vector Graphics
18540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18543 (SVG, file extension
18544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18556 \begin_inset Index idx
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18591 Encapsulated PostScript
18592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18595 (EPS, file extension
18596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18608 \begin_inset Index idx
18611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18643 Portable Document Format
18644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18647 (PDF, file extension
18648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18660 \begin_inset Index idx
18663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18678 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18679 result will not be scalable.
18680 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18686 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18694 \begin_layout Standard
18695 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18702 \begin_layout Subsection
18703 Grouping of Image Settings
18704 \begin_inset Index idx
18707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18708 Images ! Settings grouping
18716 \begin_layout Standard
18717 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18719 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18720 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18722 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18723 need to manually change each of them.
18727 \begin_layout Standard
18728 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18735 \begin_inset space ~
18747 \begin_inset space ~
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18757 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18758 and checking the name of the desired group.
18761 \begin_layout Section
18763 \begin_inset Index idx
18766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18782 \begin_layout Standard
18783 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18786 arg "tabular-insert"
18791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18795 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18796 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18797 from the rest of the table.
18798 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18799 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18801 Here is an example table:
18804 \begin_layout Standard
18806 \begin_inset Tabular
18807 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18808 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18812 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19012 \begin_layout Subsection
19016 \begin_layout Standard
19017 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19020 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19024 This brings up the table dialog.
19025 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19026 cursor is placed currently.
19027 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19028 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19029 done on all of your selection.
19032 \begin_layout Standard
19033 In addition to the table dialog, the
19036 \begin_inset space ~
19041 helps you in setting table properties.
19042 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19045 \begin_layout Standard
19049 \begin_inset space ~
19054 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19055 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19056 current cell respectively.
19057 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19059 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19060 of text, see section
19061 \begin_inset space ~
19065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19067 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19074 \begin_layout Standard
19075 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19076 using the check box
19085 This will merge the cells to
19089 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19090 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19091 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19092 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19093 in the last row without the upper border:
19096 \begin_layout Standard
19098 \begin_inset Tabular
19099 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19100 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19101 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19102 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19103 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19104 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19115 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19124 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19200 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19235 \begin_layout Standard
19236 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19237 -arguments for the table.
19238 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19239 explained in the chapter
19246 \begin_inset space ~
19252 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19253 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19254 but are visible in the output.
19257 \begin_layout Standard
19258 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19266 Most DVI-viewers are
19270 able to display rotations.
19278 \begin_layout Standard
19283 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19288 adds lines for all cell borders.
19291 \begin_layout Subsection
19293 \begin_inset Index idx
19296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 Tables ! Multi-page
19303 \begin_inset Index idx
19306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19315 \begin_layout Standard
19316 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19319 \begin_inset space ~
19323 \begin_inset space ~
19331 \begin_inset space ~
19336 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19337 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19340 \begin_layout Description
19345 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19346 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19347 Except for the first page, if
19350 \begin_inset space ~
19358 \begin_layout Description
19362 \begin_inset space ~
19367 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19368 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19371 \begin_layout Description
19376 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19377 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19378 except for the last page, if
19381 \begin_inset space ~
19389 \begin_layout Description
19393 \begin_inset space ~
19398 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19399 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19402 \begin_layout Description
19403 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19404 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19406 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19410 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19413 \begin_inset space ~
19421 \begin_layout Standard
19422 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19423 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19424 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19430 In this context, first means first in this order:
19433 \begin_inset space ~
19445 \begin_inset space ~
19450 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19453 \begin_layout Standard
19455 \begin_inset Tabular
19456 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19457 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19458 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19459 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19460 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19461 <row endfirsthead="true">
19462 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19468 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19473 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19482 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19492 <row endfirsthead="true">
19493 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19504 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19513 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 <row endhead="true">
19526 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19537 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19546 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19556 <row endhead="true">
19557 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19568 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19577 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19589 <row endfoot="true">
19590 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19601 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20600 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20611 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20673 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20704 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21571 <row endlastfoot="true">
21572 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21583 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 \begin_layout Subsection
21611 \begin_inset Index idx
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21623 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21630 \begin_layout Standard
21631 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21632 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21633 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21634 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21638 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21641 \begin_layout Standard
21642 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21643 for the column in the table dialog.
21644 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21645 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21649 \begin_layout Standard
21651 \begin_inset Tabular
21652 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21653 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21654 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21655 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21656 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21676 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 This is longer now.
21806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21858 This is longer now.
21863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 \begin_layout Standard
21890 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21891 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21896 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21897 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21903 Selection with the mouse or with
21907 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21908 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21909 the selection from outside the table.
21912 \begin_layout Section
21914 \begin_inset Index idx
21917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21933 \begin_layout Subsection
21937 \begin_layout Standard
21938 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21939 have a fixed location.
21941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21948 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21956 \begin_inset space ~
21961 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21962 too many notes on the current page.
21965 \begin_layout Standard
21966 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21967 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21968 and pages without text.
21969 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21970 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21971 Floats are therefore numbered.
21972 Referencing is described in section
21973 \begin_inset space ~
21977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21979 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21986 \begin_layout Standard
21987 To insert a float, use the menu
21989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21993 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21994 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21996 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21997 \begin_inset Index idx
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22006 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22007 paragraph within the float.
22008 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22009 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22010 left-clicking on the box label.
22011 A closed float box looks like this:
22012 \begin_inset Graphics
22013 filename clipart/float.png
22018 – a gray button with a red label.
22021 \begin_layout Standard
22022 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22024 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22027 \begin_layout Subsection
22029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22031 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22036 \begin_inset Index idx
22039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22040 Floats ! Figure floats
22048 \begin_layout Standard
22050 \begin_inset space ~
22054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22056 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22060 was created using the menu
22062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22063 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22069 arg "float-insert figure"
22073 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22076 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22082 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22086 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22087 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22089 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22091 \begin_inset space ~
22099 arg "layout-paragraph"
22105 \begin_layout Standard
22106 \begin_inset Float figure
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22113 \begin_inset Graphics
22114 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22129 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22133 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22146 \begin_layout Standard
22147 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22148 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22159 ) and refer to it using the menu
22161 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22167 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22171 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22172 vague references like
22173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22180 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22181 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22191 For more about cross-references, see section
22192 \begin_inset space ~
22196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22198 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22205 \begin_layout Standard
22206 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22207 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22208 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22209 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22210 as described in section
22211 \begin_inset space ~
22215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22217 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22223 \begin_inset space ~
22227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22229 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22233 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22234 You can also set the images one below the other.
22236 \begin_inset space ~
22240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22242 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22249 reference "fig:Platypus"
22253 are the subfigures.
22256 \begin_layout Standard
22257 \begin_inset Float figure
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22267 \begin_inset Float figure
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22273 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22278 name "fig:Undefinable"
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 \begin_inset Graphics
22292 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22303 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22307 \begin_inset Float figure
22312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22318 name "fig:Platypus"
22330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22331 \begin_inset Graphics
22332 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22344 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22356 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22360 Two distorted images.
22373 \begin_layout Subsection
22375 \begin_inset Index idx
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 Floats ! Table floats
22387 \begin_layout Standard
22388 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22391 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22394 or the toolbar button
22397 arg "float-insert table"
22401 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22402 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22403 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22405 \begin_inset space ~
22409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22411 reference "tab:Table-float"
22418 \begin_layout Standard
22419 \begin_inset Float table
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22425 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22430 name "tab:Table-float"
22442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22444 \begin_inset Tabular
22445 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22446 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22447 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22448 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22449 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22576 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22600 \end{array}\right]$
22608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22642 \begin_layout Subsection
22644 \begin_inset Index idx
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 \begin_layout Standard
22658 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22659 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22660 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22662 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22670 \begin_inset space ~
22678 \begin_layout Section
22680 \begin_inset Index idx
22683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22692 \begin_layout Standard
22694 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22696 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22697 \begin_inset space \space{}
22704 \begin_layout Standard
22705 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22706 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22712 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22713 and its alignment within the page.
22716 \begin_layout Standard
22718 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22728 height_special "totalheight"
22733 backgroundcolor "none"
22736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 This is a minipage.
22740 The text is set in an italic style.
22743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22746 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22747 another formatting.
22755 \begin_layout Standard
22756 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22759 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22763 as described in section
22764 \begin_inset space ~
22768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22770 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22775 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22781 \begin_layout Standard
22782 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22792 height_special "totalheight"
22797 backgroundcolor "none"
22800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22801 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22802 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22808 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22812 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22822 height_special "totalheight"
22827 backgroundcolor "none"
22830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22831 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22832 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22840 \begin_layout Standard
22841 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22847 \begin_layout Standard
22848 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22850 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22857 \begin_inset space ~
22865 \begin_layout Chapter
22866 Mathematical Formulas
22867 \begin_inset Index idx
22870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 \begin_inset Index idx
22880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22911 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22918 \begin_layout Standard
22919 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22924 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22927 \begin_layout Section
22929 \begin_inset Index idx
22932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22941 \begin_layout Standard
22942 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22955 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22957 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22958 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22959 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22967 \begin_layout Standard
22968 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22972 \begin_inset space ~
22977 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22980 \begin_layout Standard
22981 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22982 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22985 \begin_layout Standard
22986 This is a line with an inline formula
22987 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22993 \begin_layout Standard
22994 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22995 paragraph, like this one:
22996 \begin_inset Formula
23003 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23006 \begin_layout Standard
23008 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23010 For example, typing
23011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23024 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23025 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23029 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23032 \begin_inset space ~
23040 \begin_layout Subsection
23041 Navigating in Formulas
23042 \begin_inset Index idx
23045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23054 \begin_layout Standard
23055 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23056 achieved with the arrow keys.
23058 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23059 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23064 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23065 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23069 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23073 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23076 \end{array}\right]$
23084 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23089 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23090 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23093 \begin_layout Standard
23098 , printed in this document as
23099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23103 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23110 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23111 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23112 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23117 For example, if you want
23118 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23126 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23136 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23140 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23145 , since in the latter case only the
23148 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23153 will be under the square root sign:
23154 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23160 \begin_layout Standard
23161 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23163 \begin_inset Formula
23165 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23174 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23175 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23178 \begin_layout Subsection
23182 \begin_layout Standard
23183 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23184 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23188 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23189 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23190 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23191 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23192 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23196 \begin_layout Subsection
23197 Exponents and Subscripts
23198 \begin_inset Index idx
23201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23208 \begin_inset Index idx
23211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23220 \begin_layout Standard
23221 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23224 arg "math-superscript"
23230 arg "math-subscript"
23233 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23235 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23238 , type in a formula
23241 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23251 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23257 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23261 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23267 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23273 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23282 , you have to use an extra
23286 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23287 For example, if you want
23288 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23294 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23300 Subscripts are similar: To get
23301 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23307 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23315 \begin_layout Subsection
23317 \begin_inset Index idx
23320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23329 \begin_layout Standard
23330 Create a fraction either with the command
23336 or by using the icon
23339 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23345 \begin_inset space ~
23351 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23352 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23353 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23358 To move back up, press
23363 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23364 \begin_inset Formula
23366 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23369 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23377 \begin_layout Subsection
23379 \begin_inset Index idx
23382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23391 \begin_layout Standard
23392 Roots can be created using the
23395 \begin_inset space ~
23403 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23409 arg "math-insert \\root"
23431 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23437 always produces a square root.
23440 \begin_layout Subsection
23441 Operators with Limits
23442 \begin_inset Index idx
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 \begin_inset Index idx
23455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23464 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23471 \begin_layout Standard
23473 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23477 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23480 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23481 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23482 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23483 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23484 The sum operator will automatically place its
23485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23492 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23494 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23498 \begin_inset Formula
23500 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23505 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23509 \begin_layout Standard
23510 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23512 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23513 behind the operator and using the menu
23515 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23516 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23518 \begin_inset space ~
23522 \begin_inset space ~
23536 \begin_layout Standard
23537 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23546 \begin_inset Index idx
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23556 \begin_inset Formula
23558 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23563 which will place the
23564 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23576 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23577 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23583 \begin_layout Standard
23584 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23591 Have a look at section
23592 \begin_inset space ~
23596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23598 reference "subsec:Functions"
23602 for an explanation of function macros.
23605 \begin_layout Subsection
23607 \begin_inset Index idx
23610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23619 \begin_layout Standard
23620 Most math symbols can be found in the
23623 \begin_inset space ~
23628 under one of several categories; including
23645 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23649 \begin_layout Standard
23650 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23651 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23652 don't have to use the
23655 \begin_inset space ~
23660 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23662 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23665 \begin_layout Subsection
23667 \begin_inset Index idx
23670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23679 \begin_layout Standard
23680 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23686 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23692 \begin_inset space ~
23700 arg "math-insert \\space"
23704 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23705 For example, the sequence
23710 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23713 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23715 \begin_inset Graphics
23716 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23721 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23722 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23723 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23724 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23725 , because they are negative
23727 Here are two examples:
23730 \begin_layout Standard
23740 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23746 \begin_layout Standard
23756 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23762 \begin_layout Subsection
23764 \begin_inset Index idx
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23776 name "subsec:Functions"
23783 \begin_layout Standard
23787 \begin_inset space ~
23792 contains under the button
23795 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23798 a number of function macros, such as
23799 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23803 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23811 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23818 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23819 avoid confusions, because
23820 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23824 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23830 \begin_layout Standard
23831 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23833 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23837 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23843 \begin_layout Standard
23844 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23845 are placed, as described in section
23846 \begin_inset space ~
23850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23852 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23859 \begin_layout Subsection
23861 \begin_inset Index idx
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23873 \begin_layout Standard
23874 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23876 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23877 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23878 commands, for example, to enter
23879 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23882 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23883 Our example is entered by typing
23888 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23895 \begin_inset space ~
23899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23901 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23905 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23908 \begin_layout Standard
23909 \begin_inset Float table
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23920 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23924 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 \begin_inset Tabular
23935 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23936 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23939 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24023 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24077 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24131 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24185 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24239 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24293 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24347 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24401 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24455 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24500 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24521 \begin_layout Standard
24522 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24525 \begin_inset space ~
24533 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24536 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24540 \begin_layout Section
24541 Brackets and Delimiters
24542 \begin_inset Index idx
24545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 \begin_inset Index idx
24555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24564 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24571 \begin_layout Standard
24572 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24574 For some purposes, using just the keys
24579 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24580 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24581 toolbar delimiter icon
24584 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24588 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24589 \begin_inset Formula
24591 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24599 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24600 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24604 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24607 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24613 \begin_inset Formula
24615 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24623 \begin_layout Standard
24624 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24625 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24629 \begin_layout Standard
24630 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24631 left side and right side.
24632 If you use the option
24635 \begin_inset space ~
24640 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24641 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24643 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24648 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24649 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24652 \begin_layout Standard
24653 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24654 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24655 is to go inside the brackets.
24656 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24661 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24662 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24663 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24667 arg "math-delim ( )"
24673 \begin_layout Section
24674 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24675 \begin_inset Index idx
24678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24685 \begin_inset Index idx
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24695 \begin_inset Index idx
24698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24707 \begin_layout Standard
24708 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24712 \begin_inset space ~
24720 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24724 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24725 Here is an example:
24726 \begin_inset Formula
24728 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24737 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24738 \begin_inset space ~
24742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24744 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24749 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24750 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24751 This alignment is set in the box
24756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24805 for every column as default.
24806 For example, the sequence
24807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24818 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24819 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24820 corresponds to the relevant column.
24821 The result will look like this:
24822 \begin_inset Formula
24825 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24826 column & has & has\,right\\
24827 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24836 \begin_layout Standard
24837 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24840 arg "newline-insert newline"
24843 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24844 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24846 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24849 or the math toolbar.
24852 \begin_layout Standard
24853 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24854 It can be created with the menu
24856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24857 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24859 \begin_inset space ~
24871 Here is an example:
24872 \begin_inset Formula
24886 \begin_layout Standard
24887 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24890 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24893 arg "newline-insert newline"
24897 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24902 arg "newline-insert newline"
24905 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24913 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24914 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24915 A new row is created by every further entry of
24918 arg "newline-insert newline"
24922 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24923 Here is an example:
24924 \begin_inset Formula
24926 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24927 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24932 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24933 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24934 \begin_inset Formula
24936 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24944 \begin_layout Standard
24945 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24952 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24953 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24956 reference "eq:asquared"
24961 The other types are described in section
24962 \begin_inset space ~
24966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24968 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24975 \begin_layout Section
24976 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24977 \begin_inset Index idx
24980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24981 Math ! Formula numbering
24987 \begin_inset Index idx
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24991 Math ! Referencing formulas
24997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24999 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25006 \begin_layout Standard
25007 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25009 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25010 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25012 \begin_inset space ~
25016 \begin_inset space ~
25024 arg "math-number-toggle"
25028 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25029 within parentheses.
25030 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25031 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25032 the document class.
25033 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25034 separated by a dot:
25035 \begin_inset Formula
25045 arg "math-number-toggle"
25048 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25049 You can only number displayed formulas.
25052 \begin_layout Standard
25053 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25055 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25056 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25058 \begin_inset space ~
25062 \begin_inset space ~
25070 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25073 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25074 \begin_inset Formula
25077 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25083 To number all lines use the shortcut
25086 arg "math-number-toggle"
25092 \begin_layout Standard
25093 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25096 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25097 A label is inserted with the menu
25099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25108 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25109 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25110 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25122 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25123 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25124 We inserted in the following example the label
25125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25132 in the second line:
25133 \begin_inset Formula
25135 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25136 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25141 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25142 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25143 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25147 \begin_inset space ~
25155 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25159 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25160 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25161 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25162 as the formula number:
25165 \begin_layout Standard
25166 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25169 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25176 \begin_layout Standard
25177 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25178 's cross-reference box are described in section
25179 \begin_inset space ~
25183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25185 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25190 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25198 \begin_layout Section
25199 User defined math macros
25200 \begin_inset Index idx
25203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 \begin_layout Standard
25214 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25215 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25216 Math macros are explained in section
25219 \begin_inset space ~
25231 \begin_layout Section
25235 \begin_layout Subsection
25237 \begin_inset Index idx
25240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25249 \begin_layout Standard
25250 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25251 To set a font in a formula, use the
25254 \begin_inset space ~
25262 arg "math-insert \\font"
25265 , or enter its command, listed in table
25266 \begin_inset space ~
25270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25272 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25279 \begin_layout Standard
25280 \begin_inset Float table
25285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25291 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25295 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25305 \begin_inset Tabular
25306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25307 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25341 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25368 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25395 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25428 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25455 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25516 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25543 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25577 \begin_layout Standard
25578 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25586 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25602 \begin_layout Standard
25603 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25604 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25609 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25610 space when you need a space in the box.
25611 Here is an example where
25612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25623 denotes the set of numbers:
25624 \begin_inset Formula
25626 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25634 \begin_layout Standard
25635 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25636 You can, for example, put a character in
25645 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25649 \begin_inset Newline newline
25652 So it is better not to use this feature.
25655 \begin_layout Standard
25656 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25657 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25661 \begin_inset Newline newline
25664 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25670 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25671 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25677 \begin_layout Standard
25684 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25687 \begin_layout Standard
25688 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25690 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25691 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25693 \begin_inset space ~
25701 \begin_layout Subsection
25703 \begin_inset Index idx
25706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25715 \begin_layout Standard
25716 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25718 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25722 \begin_inset space ~
25726 \begin_inset space ~
25734 \begin_inset space ~
25742 arg "math-insert \\font"
25746 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25747 in black instead of blue.
25748 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25749 Here is an example:
25750 \begin_inset Formula
25753 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25754 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25763 \begin_layout Subsection
25765 \begin_inset Index idx
25768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25777 \begin_layout Standard
25778 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25779 automatically chosen in most situations.
25797 For most characters,
25805 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25806 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25811 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25812 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25813 thinks are appropriate.
25814 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25817 arg "math-insert \\style"
25821 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25822 For example, you can set
25823 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25826 , which is normally in
25835 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25839 The four styles are used in the following example:
25842 \begin_layout Standard
25843 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25847 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25851 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25855 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25861 \begin_layout Standard
25862 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25863 is set in a particular size with the menu
25865 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25867 \begin_inset space ~
25872 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25873 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25874 will be adjusted to correspond.
25875 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25886 \begin_layout Standard
25890 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25896 \begin_layout Section
25897 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25899 \begin_inset Index idx
25902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25909 \begin_inset Index idx
25912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25921 \begin_layout Standard
25923 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25924 that are in common use.
25927 \begin_layout Subsection
25928 Enabling AMS-Support
25931 \begin_layout Standard
25932 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25933 the document by selecting the checkbox
25936 \begin_inset space ~
25940 \begin_inset space ~
25944 \begin_inset space ~
25951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25955 \begin_inset Index idx
25958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25959 Document ! Settings
25967 \begin_inset space ~
25973 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25974 -errors in formulas,
25975 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25978 \begin_layout Subsection
25980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25982 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25987 \begin_inset Index idx
25990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25991 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25999 \begin_layout Standard
26000 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26001 provides a selection of different formula types.
26003 allows you to choose between
26024 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26025 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26031 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26034 \begin_layout Chapter
26038 \begin_layout Section
26040 \begin_inset Index idx
26043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26052 name "sec:Cross-References"
26059 \begin_layout Standard
26060 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26061 's strengths is cross-references.
26062 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26064 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26065 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26066 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26069 \begin_layout Enumerate
26073 \begin_layout Enumerate
26074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26076 name "enu:Second-item"
26083 \begin_layout Enumerate
26087 \begin_layout Standard
26088 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26093 or by pressing the toolbar button
26100 A gray label box like this:
26101 \begin_inset Graphics
26102 filename clipart/label.png
26106 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26108 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26143 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26144 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26160 \begin_layout Standard
26161 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26163 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26166 or the toolbar button
26169 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26173 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26174 \begin_inset Graphics
26175 filename clipart/reference.png
26179 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26181 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26194 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26198 \begin_layout Standard
26199 As an alternative to
26201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26204 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26209 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26210 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26212 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26224 \begin_layout Standard
26225 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26226 \begin_inset space ~
26230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26232 reference "enu:Second-item"
26239 \begin_layout Standard
26240 It is recommended to use a protected space
26244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26245 described in section
26246 \begin_inset space ~
26250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26252 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26261 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26262 line breaks between them.
26265 \begin_layout Standard
26266 There are six formats of cross-references:
26269 \begin_layout Description
26270 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26273 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26280 \begin_layout Description
26281 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26282 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26294 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26301 \begin_layout Description
26302 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26303 \begin_inset space ~
26307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26308 LatexCommand pageref
26309 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26316 \begin_layout Description
26318 \begin_inset space ~
26322 \begin_inset space ~
26325 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26327 LatexCommand vpageref
26328 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26333 \begin_inset Newline newline
26336 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26337 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26338 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26339 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26340 it prints “on the next page”.
26341 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26344 \begin_layout Description
26346 \begin_inset space ~
26350 \begin_inset space ~
26354 \begin_inset space ~
26357 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26360 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26365 \begin_inset Newline newline
26368 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26374 ; otherwise it behaves like
26378 \begin_inset space ~
26382 \begin_inset space ~
26391 \begin_layout Description
26393 \begin_inset space ~
26396 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26397 \begin_inset Newline newline
26401 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26409 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26419 \begin_inset Index idx
26422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26424 -packages ! prettyref
26430 \begin_inset Index idx
26433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26435 -packages ! refstyle
26446 \begin_inset Newline newline
26449 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26450 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26453 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26458 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26466 is the default and preferred because
26470 supports only English documents.
26471 The format is specified by using the command
26483 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26484 preamble of the document.
26485 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26498 ) can be done with this command
26499 \begin_inset Newline newline
26506 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26511 \begin_inset Newline newline
26514 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26516 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26518 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26525 \begin_layout Description
26527 \begin_inset space ~
26530 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26532 LatexCommand nameref
26533 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26540 \begin_layout Standard
26541 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26542 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26544 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26548 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26552 \begin_layout Standard
26553 You can only use the style
26557 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26561 is always possible.
26564 \begin_layout Standard
26565 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26566 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26568 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26569 \begin_inset space ~
26573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26575 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26582 \begin_layout Standard
26583 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26587 \begin_inset space ~
26591 \begin_inset space ~
26596 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26597 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26600 \begin_inset space ~
26605 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26606 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26609 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26615 \begin_layout Standard
26616 You can change labels at any time.
26617 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26618 do not need to think about this.
26621 \begin_layout Standard
26622 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26624 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26628 \begin_layout Standard
26629 References are described in detail in the section
26630 \begin_inset space ~
26640 \begin_inset space ~
26648 \begin_layout Section
26649 Table of Contents and other Listings
26650 \begin_inset Index idx
26653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26660 \begin_inset Index idx
26663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26664 Navigating ! Outline
26670 \begin_inset Index idx
26673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26689 \begin_layout Subsection
26691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26693 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26700 \begin_layout Standard
26701 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26704 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26706 \begin_inset space ~
26710 \begin_inset space ~
26716 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26718 If you click on it, the
26722 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26723 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26724 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26726 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26728 \begin_inset space ~
26733 that is described in section
26734 \begin_inset space ~
26738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26740 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26747 \begin_layout Standard
26748 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26749 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26751 \begin_inset space ~
26755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26757 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26761 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26763 \begin_inset space ~
26767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26769 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26773 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26775 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26778 \begin_layout Subsection
26779 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26782 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26789 \begin_layout Standard
26790 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26792 You can insert them via the
26794 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26798 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26801 \begin_layout Section
26802 URLs and Hyperlinks
26803 \begin_inset Index idx
26806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26813 \begin_inset Index idx
26816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26825 \begin_layout Subsection
26827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26836 \begin_layout Standard
26837 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26839 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26845 \begin_layout Standard
26846 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26848 \begin_inset Flex URL
26851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26861 \begin_layout Standard
26862 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26868 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26872 \begin_layout Standard
26873 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26881 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26890 \begin_layout Subsection
26892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26894 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26901 \begin_layout Standard
26902 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26904 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26907 or with the toolbar button
26914 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26923 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26924 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26925 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26927 name "LyX's homepage"
26928 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26932 , an Email address like this:
26933 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26935 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26936 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26941 , or a link to a file.
26944 \begin_layout Standard
26945 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26958 to the link target.
26961 \begin_layout Standard
26962 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26963 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26964 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26965 the text style dialog.
26966 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26970 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26972 name "LyX's homepage"
26973 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26980 \begin_layout Standard
26981 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26985 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26987 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26988 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26992 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26994 \begin_inset Newline newline
27002 \begin_inset Newline newline
27009 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27012 \begin_layout Section
27014 \begin_inset Index idx
27017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27026 name "sec:Appendices"
27033 \begin_layout Standard
27034 Appendices are created with the menu
27036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27038 \begin_inset space ~
27042 \begin_inset space ~
27048 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27049 as the appendix part of the book.
27050 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27053 \begin_layout Standard
27054 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27055 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27056 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27057 and the subsection number.
27058 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27062 \begin_layout Standard
27064 \begin_inset space ~
27068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27070 reference "chap:Credits"
27075 \begin_inset space ~
27079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27081 reference "subsec:Export"
27088 \begin_layout Section
27090 \begin_inset Index idx
27093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27102 name "sec:Bibliography"
27109 \begin_layout Standard
27110 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27112 You can include a bibliography database,
27116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27117 Known under the name
27118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27121 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27131 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27132 manually, using the paragraph environment
27136 , which was described in section
27137 \begin_inset space ~
27141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27143 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27148 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27149 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27153 use a bibliography database.
27156 \begin_layout Subsection
27157 The Bibliography Environment
27160 \begin_layout Standard
27165 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27167 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27176 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27178 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27188 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27191 \begin_layout Standard
27192 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27197 or the toolbar button
27200 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27204 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27205 containing the available citations.
27206 Select one or more keys from the list and
27216 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27217 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27221 \begin_layout Standard
27222 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27223 entry with surrounding brackets.
27228 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27229 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27241 \begin_layout Standard
27245 Companion Second Edition
27248 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27250 key "latexcompanion"
27257 \begin_layout Standard
27258 The \SpecialChar LyX
27259 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27269 \begin_layout Standard
27270 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27273 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27275 \begin_inset space ~
27283 arg "layout-paragraph"
27287 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27290 \begin_layout Subsection
27291 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27293 \begin_inset Index idx
27296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27297 Bibliography ! Databases
27303 \begin_inset Index idx
27306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27307 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27316 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27323 \begin_layout Standard
27324 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27330 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27332 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27333 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27338 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27340 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27341 your working field in a database.
27342 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27343 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27344 list for that document.
27345 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27349 \begin_layout Standard
27350 The database is a text file with the file extension
27351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27362 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27363 The format is explained in
27364 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27370 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27372 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27374 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27379 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27380 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27381 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27383 \begin_inset Flex URL
27386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27388 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27396 \begin_layout Standard
27397 To use a database, use the menu
27399 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27404 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27406 \begin_inset space ~
27412 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27413 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27420 Add bibliography to TOC
27422 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27427 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27428 in the document or just the cited references.
27431 \begin_layout Standard
27432 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27444 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27445 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27446 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27447 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27449 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27455 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27456 \begin_inset Newline newline
27460 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27462 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27474 \begin_layout Standard
27475 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27478 \begin_layout Standard
27479 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27480 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27482 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27489 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27490 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27496 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27497 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27501 The following variants are possible:
27504 \begin_layout Description
27505 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27506 with other bibliography packages (e.
27507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27511 \begin_inset space \space{}
27518 ), only with the package
27522 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27526 \begin_layout Description
27527 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27528 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27529 with all bibliography packages, except
27534 \begin_layout Description
27535 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27540 , works with all bibliography packages
27543 \begin_layout Standard
27544 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27545 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27547 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27550 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27554 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27563 \begin_layout Standard
27564 When you select the option
27566 Sectioned bibliography
27570 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27571 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27574 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27575 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27577 Customizing Bibliographies
27581 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27586 Additional Features
27591 \begin_layout Standard
27592 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27593 the two methods of creating them.
27594 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27595 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27596 We used the style file
27600 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27603 \begin_layout Subsection
27605 \begin_inset Index idx
27608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27609 Bibliography ! Citation format
27617 \begin_layout Standard
27618 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27619 For this feature you need to enable the option
27625 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27629 \begin_inset Index idx
27632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27633 Document ! Settings
27643 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27644 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27645 style files as explained in
27646 the previous section.
27649 \begin_layout Standard
27650 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27651 the citation reference window.
27652 Here is an example where the text
27653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27657 \begin_inset space ~
27661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27664 appears after the reference:
27667 \begin_layout Standard
27669 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27672 key "latexcompanion"
27679 \begin_layout Section
27681 \begin_inset Index idx
27684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27700 \begin_layout Standard
27701 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27705 \begin_inset space ~
27710 or the toolbar button
27717 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27718 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27719 by \SpecialChar LyX
27720 as the index entry.
27723 \begin_layout Standard
27724 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27727 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27729 \begin_inset space ~
27735 A light blue box labeled
27736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27747 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27748 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27752 \begin_layout Standard
27753 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27754 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27755 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27756 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27758 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27760 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27767 \begin_layout Subsection
27768 Grouping Index Entries
27769 \begin_inset Index idx
27772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27781 \begin_layout Standard
27782 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27784 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27785 lists under the entry
27786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27794 First we create the entry
27795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27803 \begin_inset space ~
27807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27809 reference "subsec:Lists"
27814 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27815 \begin_inset space ~
27819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27821 reference "sec:Itemize"
27825 , we insert the command
27828 \begin_layout Standard
27834 \begin_layout Standard
27838 \begin_layout Standard
27844 \begin_layout Standard
27845 for the enumerated list in section
27846 \begin_inset space ~
27850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27852 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27859 \begin_layout Standard
27860 The exclamation mark
27861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27868 marks the grouping levels.
27869 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27870 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27871 If we don't have an index entry for
27872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27879 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27882 \begin_layout Subsection
27884 \begin_inset Index idx
27887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27888 Index ! Page ranges
27896 \begin_layout Standard
27897 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27899 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27900 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27901 an index entry in section
27902 \begin_inset space ~
27906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27908 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27915 \begin_layout Standard
27918 Paragraph environments|(
27921 \begin_layout Standard
27922 and another entry at the end of section
27923 \begin_inset space ~
27927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27929 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27936 \begin_layout Standard
27939 Paragraph environments|)
27942 \begin_layout Standard
27944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27967 respectively start and end the index range.
27968 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27969 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27970 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27971 An example is the index entry
27972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27975 Document ! Settings
27976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27982 \begin_layout Subsection
27984 \begin_inset Index idx
27987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27988 Index ! Cross referencing
27996 \begin_layout Standard
27997 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27998 We referred for example in the index entry
27999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28007 \begin_inset space ~
28011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28013 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28017 ) to the index entry
28018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28025 in the same section using the entry
28028 \begin_layout Standard
28031 GIF|see{Image formats}
28034 \begin_layout Standard
28035 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28037 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28038 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28041 \begin_layout Subsection
28043 \begin_inset Index idx
28046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28047 Index ! Entry order
28055 \begin_layout Standard
28056 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28057 follow the rules for the index order.
28058 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28064 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28066 \begin_inset space ~
28070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28072 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28081 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28082 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28107 \begin_inset Index idx
28110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28111 Dummy entries ! maïs
28117 \begin_inset Index idx
28120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28121 Dummy entries ! maître
28127 \begin_inset Index idx
28130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28131 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28136 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28137 maïs, maison, maître.
28138 To achieve this, we use the command
28141 \begin_layout Standard
28144 previous entry@current entry
28147 \begin_layout Standard
28148 In our case we want to have
28149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28164 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28167 \begin_layout Standard
28173 \begin_layout Standard
28174 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28175 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28177 See the next subsection for an example.
28180 \begin_layout Standard
28181 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28187 \begin_layout Standard
28188 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28193 to generate the index (see section
28194 \begin_inset space ~
28198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28200 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28209 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28210 -package aeguill in section
28211 \begin_inset space ~
28215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28217 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28221 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28222 -packages although all these index
28223 commands start with
28224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28237 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28242 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28245 \begin_layout Standard
28257 \begin_layout Standard
28269 \begin_layout Subsection
28271 \begin_inset Index idx
28274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28275 Index ! Entry layout
28283 \begin_layout Standard
28284 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28285 \begin_inset Index idx
28288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28291 This is an italic dummy entry
28296 You can also format the page number using the character
28297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28304 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28305 -command without a backslash.
28306 We can write for example
28309 \begin_layout Standard
28312 italic page number:|textit
28315 \begin_layout Standard
28316 to get the page number in italic.
28317 \begin_inset Index idx
28320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28321 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28326 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28327 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28345 \begin_inset space ~
28351 Have a look at section
28352 \begin_inset space ~
28356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28358 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28362 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28366 \begin_layout Standard
28367 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28375 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28379 to generate the index, see section
28380 \begin_inset space ~
28384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28386 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28395 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28400 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28401 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28404 key "latexcompanion"
28416 \begin_layout Standard
28417 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28419 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28420 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28421 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28422 If so, put the following in the preamble
28425 \begin_layout Standard
28437 \begin_layout Standard
28441 \begin_layout Standard
28447 \begin_layout Standard
28448 in the index entry.
28449 \begin_inset Index idx
28452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28453 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28458 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28459 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28460 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28463 \begin_layout Standard
28464 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28465 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28466 a bold font for all index entries.
28467 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28479 documentation for details,
28480 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28482 key "makeindex,xindy"
28489 \begin_layout Subsection
28491 \begin_inset Index idx
28494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28503 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28510 \begin_layout Standard
28511 If the index generation program
28515 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28516 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28520 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28521 distribution, is used.
28525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28530 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28531 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28532 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28533 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28534 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28544 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28546 dialog, see section
28547 \begin_inset space ~
28551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28553 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28558 The available options are listed and explained in
28559 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28561 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28566 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28570 \begin_layout Standard
28571 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28572 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28575 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28576 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28580 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28581 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28584 \begin_layout Subsection
28588 \begin_layout Standard
28589 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28590 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28598 next to the standard index.
28600 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28601 that add this feature.
28608 \begin_inset Index idx
28611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28613 -packages ! splitidx
28618 package to generate multiple indexes.
28619 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28625 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28627 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28634 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28635 style, but it also includes
28636 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28637 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28645 \begin_layout Standard
28646 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28647 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28649 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28650 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28653 and select the option
28655 Use multiple Indexes
28662 already contains the standard index
28663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28671 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28672 also appear as a heading) to the
28676 input field and press the
28681 The new index now also appears in the list.
28682 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28683 label color to the new index.
28686 \begin_layout Standard
28687 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28697 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28698 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28699 are additional features:
28702 \begin_layout Itemize
28703 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28704 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28707 \begin_layout Itemize
28708 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28709 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28717 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28718 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28719 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28720 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28723 \begin_layout Section
28724 Nomenclature/Glossary
28725 \begin_inset Index idx
28728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28735 \begin_inset Index idx
28738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28769 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28776 \begin_layout Standard
28777 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28778 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28779 called nomenclature or glossary.
28782 \begin_layout Standard
28783 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28790 \begin_inset Index idx
28793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28795 -packages ! nomencl
28801 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28803 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28809 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28813 \begin_layout Standard
28814 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28815 and then use the menu
28817 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28823 \begin_inset space ~
28828 or the toolbar button
28831 arg "nomencl-insert"
28836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28847 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28850 \begin_layout Standard
28851 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28852 The first is the term or
28856 that you wish to define.
28861 of the term or symbol.
28864 \begin_layout Standard
28865 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28873 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28874 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28882 \begin_layout Subsection
28883 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28884 \begin_inset Index idx
28887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28888 Nomenclature ! Layout
28896 \begin_layout Standard
28897 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28901 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28908 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28916 \begin_inset Newline newline
28924 \begin_inset Newline newline
28930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28937 character starts/ends the formula.
28938 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28939 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28951 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28961 \begin_layout Standard
28962 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28963 -syntax is given in section
28964 \begin_inset space ~
28968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28970 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28977 \begin_layout Standard
28981 \begin_inset space ~
28986 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28988 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28993 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29000 in this document is:
29001 \begin_inset Newline newline
29006 dummy entry for the character
29011 \begin_inset Newline newline
29023 \begin_inset space ~
29033 font use the command
29062 \begin_layout Standard
29063 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29068 \begin_inset space \space{}
29072 \begin_inset Newline newline
29088 \begin_inset Newline newline
29091 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29092 This command will make the font of all symbols
29099 \begin_inset space ~
29107 \begin_layout Standard
29108 If the characters |
29109 \begin_inset space \space{}
29113 \begin_inset space \space{}
29117 \begin_inset space \space{}
29121 \begin_inset space \space{}
29125 \begin_inset space \space{}
29128 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29129 a quote character in front of them.
29130 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29131 LatexCommand nomenclature
29132 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29133 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29140 \begin_layout Subsection
29141 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29142 \begin_inset Index idx
29145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29146 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29154 \begin_layout Standard
29155 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29156 -code of the symbol
29158 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29160 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29163 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29164 LatexCommand nomenclature
29166 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29173 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29177 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29178 LatexCommand nomenclature
29181 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29186 They will be sorted by
29187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29213 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29216 will be sorted before the
29220 since the character
29221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29228 is considered in sorting.
29231 \begin_layout Standard
29232 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29235 \begin_inset space ~
29240 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29241 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29243 For the example given, you can insert
29247 in this field for the
29248 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29255 will be located before
29256 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29262 \begin_layout Standard
29263 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29268 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29277 \begin_layout Subsection
29278 Nomenclature Options
29279 \begin_inset Index idx
29282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29283 Nomenclature ! Options
29291 \begin_layout Standard
29296 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29297 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29300 \begin_layout Description
29301 refeq Appends the phrase
29302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29317 to every nomenclature entry, where
29323 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29326 \begin_layout Description
29327 refpage Appends the phrase
29328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29343 to every nomenclature entry, where
29349 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29352 \begin_layout Description
29353 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29356 \begin_layout Standard
29357 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29358 class options list in the
29360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29364 In this document the options
29371 \begin_layout Standard
29372 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29378 \begin_layout Standard
29379 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29380 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29385 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29388 \begin_layout Description
29398 \begin_layout Description
29401 nomrefpage Like the
29408 \begin_layout Description
29411 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29420 \begin_layout Description
29424 \begin_inset space ~
29430 \begin_inset space ~
29435 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29438 \begin_layout Standard
29440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29447 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29448 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29452 \begin_layout Standard
29460 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29463 \begin_inset Newline newline
29470 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29475 \begin_inset Newline newline
29479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29494 by their translation.
29497 \begin_layout Subsection
29498 Printing the Nomenclature
29499 \begin_inset Index idx
29502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29503 Nomenclature ! Printing
29511 \begin_layout Standard
29512 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29514 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29515 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29531 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29532 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29533 You can choose between these settings:
29536 \begin_layout Description
29537 Default a space of 1
29538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29544 \begin_layout Description
29546 \begin_inset space ~
29550 \begin_inset space ~
29553 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29556 \begin_layout Description
29557 Custom custom space
29560 \begin_layout Standard
29561 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29570 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29578 For example, in order to change the name to
29582 , add the following line to the preamble:
29585 \begin_layout Standard
29593 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29596 \begin_layout Subsection
29597 Nomenclature Program
29598 \begin_inset Index idx
29601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29602 Nomenclature ! Program
29608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29610 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29617 \begin_layout Standard
29623 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29624 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29626 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29631 by adding options, see section
29632 \begin_inset space ~
29636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29638 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29643 The available options are listed and explained in
29644 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29646 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29653 \begin_layout Section
29655 \begin_inset Index idx
29658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29665 \begin_inset Index idx
29668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29669 Document ! Branches
29675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29677 name "sec:Branches"
29684 \begin_layout Standard
29685 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29686 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29687 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29688 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29691 \begin_layout Standard
29692 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29693 allows you to put text into branches.
29694 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29695 To create a branch, either select the menu
29697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29698 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29701 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29703 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29710 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29711 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29712 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29713 and whether the name of the branch should
29714 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29715 (see below for an example).
29716 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29717 to the name of the other) and to add
29718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29730 \begin_inset space ~
29733 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29734 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29737 \begin_layout Standard
29738 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29739 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29741 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29744 where you can choose a branch.
29745 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29749 \begin_layout Standard
29750 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29751 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29754 \begin_layout Standard
29755 \begin_inset Branch Question
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29760 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29768 \begin_layout Standard
29769 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29773 \begin_layout Standard
29774 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29782 \begin_layout Standard
29789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29790 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29793 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29794 Consider for example a file
29795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29802 which has the above branches.
29804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29811 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29835 branch were inactive,
29836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29851 branch was active, likewise
29852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29867 branch was active, and
29868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29871 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29875 if both branches were active.
29876 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29877 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
29881 \begin_layout Standard
29883 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
29884 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
29885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29892 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
29898 \begin_inset Branch Question
29902 \begin_layout Standard
29904 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
29905 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
29913 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
29914 To control whether a particular inset is
29915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29922 , right-click on the inset button and choose
29923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29929 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
29931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29935 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
29939 \begin_layout Standard
29940 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29946 \begin_layout Standard
29947 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29948 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29949 definitions for each branch.
29950 For example you can define for the question branch
29954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29955 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29956 -syntax, see section
29957 \begin_inset space ~
29961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29963 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29975 \begin_layout Standard
29985 \begin_layout Standard
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 and for the answer branch
29999 \begin_layout Standard
30009 \begin_layout Standard
30019 \begin_layout Standard
30020 \begin_inset Branch Question
30024 \begin_layout Standard
30028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30056 \begin_layout Standard
30057 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30061 \begin_layout Standard
30065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30093 \begin_layout Standard
30094 Now it is possible to use the
30098 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30105 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30108 commands to obtain conditional output.
30109 Here is an example formula where only the
30116 \begin_inset Formula
30118 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30126 \begin_layout Standard
30127 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30135 \begin_layout Standard
30136 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30142 \begin_inset space \space{}
30145 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30147 For this advanced usage, see the
30153 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30158 \begin_layout Section
30160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30162 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30167 \begin_inset Index idx
30170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30179 \begin_layout Standard
30182 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30183 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30186 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30188 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30194 \begin_inset Index idx
30197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30199 -packages ! hyperref
30204 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30205 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30206 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30207 part of the document.
30211 \begin_layout Standard
30212 The header information in the dialog tab
30216 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30217 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30218 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30219 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30223 \begin_inset space ~
30227 \begin_inset space ~
30232 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30233 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30234 and author entries.
30238 \begin_inset space ~
30242 \begin_inset space ~
30246 \begin_inset space ~
30251 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30254 \begin_layout Standard
30255 You can specify in the dialog tab
30259 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30264 \begin_inset space ~
30268 \begin_inset space ~
30272 \begin_inset space ~
30277 option allows long links to be split;
30280 \begin_inset space ~
30284 \begin_inset space ~
30288 \begin_inset space ~
30296 \begin_inset space ~
30301 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30304 \begin_inset space ~
30309 colors the different links.
30310 The default colors are:
30313 \begin_layout Labeling
30314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30319 for hyperlinks and URLs
30322 \begin_layout Labeling
30323 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30331 \begin_layout Labeling
30332 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30340 \begin_layout Standard
30341 but you can change these in the field
30346 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30349 \begin_layout Standard
30352 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30355 \begin_layout Standard
30360 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30361 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30362 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30365 \begin_layout Standard
30370 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30371 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30372 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30382 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30383 when opening the PDF.
30385 \begin_inset space ~
30388 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30389 \begin_inset space ~
30392 1 will only display the sections.
30395 \begin_layout Standard
30396 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30397 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30403 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30404 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30413 \begin_layout Section
30415 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30419 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30426 \begin_layout Subsection
30429 \begin_inset Index idx
30432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30442 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30449 \begin_layout Standard
30450 As \SpecialChar LyX
30451 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30452 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30453 commands and constructs,
30456 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30457 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30458 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30459 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30460 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30461 cannot support all packages and
30465 \begin_layout Standard
30466 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30467 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30468 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30472 Code box is created by the menu
30474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30476 \begin_inset space ~
30481 or by the toolbar button
30494 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30502 \begin_layout Standard
30503 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30505 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30507 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30508 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30515 , you can write the command part
30521 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30522 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30526 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30527 Code box behind the word.
30528 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30529 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30533 \begin_layout Standard
30534 \begin_inset Graphics
30535 filename clipart/ERT.png
30543 \begin_layout Standard
30547 \begin_layout Standard
30548 This is a line with a
30552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30575 \begin_layout Standard
30576 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30584 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30585 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30586 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30587 know that the command is finished.
30595 \begin_layout Subsection
30596 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30598 \begin_inset Argument 1
30601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30602 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30609 \begin_inset Index idx
30612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30622 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30629 \begin_layout Standard
30630 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30631 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30632 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30633 uses in the background.
30634 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30635 is based on commands, you can
30636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30644 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30645 any time if you know the right commands.
30646 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30647 is the end of the day.
30648 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30649 all caption labels bold.
30650 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30652 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30656 \begin_layout Standard
30657 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30659 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30661 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30673 \begin_layout Standard
30674 As result you find that the package
30679 \begin_inset Index idx
30682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30684 -packages ! caption
30690 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30692 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30695 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30699 \begin_inset space ~
30707 \begin_layout Standard
30712 usepackage[options]{package name}
30715 \begin_layout Standard
30716 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30717 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30718 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30719 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30722 \begin_layout Standard
30723 In your case the package name is
30728 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30733 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30734 So you add the command
30737 \begin_layout Standard
30742 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30745 \begin_layout Standard
30746 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30751 For more commands provided by the
30755 package, have a look at its documentation,
30756 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30770 \begin_layout Standard
30771 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30773 For example if you use a
30777 class, you don't need the package
30781 , you can instead write
30784 \begin_layout Standard
30789 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30794 \begin_layout Standard
30795 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30796 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30797 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30804 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30807 \begin_layout Standard
30808 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30809 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30811 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30812 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30813 Code box as described in the previous
30817 \begin_layout Standard
30818 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30819 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30822 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30824 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30831 \begin_layout Standard
30832 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30838 \begin_layout Standard
30842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30852 \begin_inset Note Note
30855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30856 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30864 \begin_layout Left Header
30865 \begin_inset Argument 1
30868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30888 \begin_inset Note Note
30891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30892 defines the header line as described below
30900 \begin_layout Center Header
30901 \begin_inset Argument 1
30904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30913 \begin_layout Right Header
30914 \begin_inset Argument 1
30917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30938 \begin_layout Left Footer
30939 \begin_inset Argument 1
30942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30963 \begin_layout Center Footer
30964 \begin_inset Argument 1
30967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30979 \begin_inset Newline newline
30983 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30989 \begin_layout Right Footer
30990 \begin_inset Argument 1
30993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31015 \begin_layout Section
31016 Customized Page Headers and Footers
31017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31019 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31024 \begin_inset Index idx
31027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31028 Document ! Header/Footer line
31034 \begin_inset Index idx
31037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31046 \begin_layout Standard
31047 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31051 \begin_inset space ~
31062 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31068 \begin_inset space ~
31074 As a second step add in the menu
31076 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31077 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31086 Custom Header/Footerlines
31089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31093 This module offers the following 6
31094 \begin_inset space ~
31100 \begin_layout Description
31102 \begin_inset space ~
31106 \begin_inset space ~
31110 \begin_inset space ~
31114 \begin_inset space ~
31118 \begin_inset space ~
31124 \begin_layout Description
31126 \begin_inset space ~
31130 \begin_inset space ~
31134 \begin_inset space ~
31138 \begin_inset space ~
31142 \begin_inset space ~
31148 \begin_layout Standard
31149 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31150 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
31153 \begin_layout Standard
31154 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31155 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31157 \begin_inset space ~
31161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31163 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31167 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31170 \begin_layout Standard
31171 \begin_inset Float figure
31177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31180 \begin_inset Tabular
31181 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31182 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31183 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31184 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31185 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31187 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31205 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31216 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31234 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31245 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31249 The normal text on the page goes here.
31250 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31252 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31253 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31258 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31267 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31278 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31296 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31307 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31325 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31343 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31348 name "fig:Page-layout"
31352 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31365 \begin_layout Standard
31366 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31374 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31378 \begin_inset space ~
31383 is set to “Default”.
31384 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31393 \begin_layout Subsection
31397 \begin_layout Standard
31398 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
31399 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
31400 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31401 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31403 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
31405 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31408 \begin_layout Standard
31409 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31410 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31414 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31416 \begin_inset space ~
31424 \begin_layout Description
31427 thepage prints the current page number
31430 \begin_layout Description
31433 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31436 \begin_layout Description
31439 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31442 \begin_layout Description
31445 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31446 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31453 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31456 because it usually goes in a left header.
31459 \begin_layout Description
31462 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31463 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31465 It is normally used in the right header.
31468 \begin_layout Subsection
31469 Default header/footer
31472 \begin_layout Standard
31473 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31474 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31475 footer has the page number.
31476 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31477 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31478 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31481 \begin_inset space ~
31489 \begin_layout Subsection
31493 \begin_layout Standard
31494 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31495 Some pages are different.
31496 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
31497 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
31498 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31499 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31500 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31503 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31504 Header and footer decoration line
31507 \begin_layout Standard
31508 By default, you get a 0.4
31509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31512 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31513 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31525 in the following way:
31528 \begin_layout Standard
31535 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31538 \begin_layout Standard
31539 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31552 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31559 \begin_layout Standard
31560 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31562 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31563 \begin_inset space ~
31567 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31577 Several header/footer lines
31580 \begin_layout Standard
31581 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31582 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
31583 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31585 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31600 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31601 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31603 \begin_inset space ~
31611 \begin_layout Standard
31618 headheight}{height}
31621 \begin_layout Standard
31626 is a size in standard units (e.
31627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31631 \begin_inset space \space{}
31639 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
31640 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31641 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31642 logfile with the menu
31644 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31646 \begin_inset space ~
31654 \begin_inset space ~
31659 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31664 \begin_inset Index idx
31667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31669 -packages ! fancyhdr
31675 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31676 for your header/footer.
31679 \begin_layout Subsection
31683 \begin_layout Standard
31684 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31685 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31686 This example consists of the following definition:
31689 \begin_layout Description
31691 \begin_inset space ~
31700 , empty optional argument
31703 \begin_layout Description
31705 \begin_inset space ~
31708 Header empty, empty optional argument
31711 \begin_layout Description
31713 \begin_inset space ~
31722 in the optional argument
31725 \begin_layout Description
31727 \begin_inset space ~
31736 in the optional argument
31739 \begin_layout Description
31741 \begin_inset space ~
31754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31758 \begin_inset Newline newline
31762 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31769 in the optional argument
31772 \begin_layout Description
31774 \begin_inset space ~
31783 , empty optional argument
31786 \begin_layout Description
31789 headrulewidth set to 2
31790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31796 \begin_layout Standard
31797 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31798 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31813 \begin_layout Standard
31814 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31820 \begin_layout Standard
31824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31828 pagestyle{headings}
31834 \begin_inset Note Note
31837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31838 switches back to page style with the default headings
31846 \begin_layout Section
31847 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31850 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31855 \begin_inset Index idx
31858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31865 \begin_inset Index idx
31868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31877 \begin_layout Standard
31879 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31880 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31881 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31884 \begin_layout Subsection
31888 \begin_layout Standard
31889 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31895 \begin_inset Index idx
31898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31900 -packages ! preview-latex
31905 (on some systems named simply
31910 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31912 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31918 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31920 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31928 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31929 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31930 -package are automatically
31931 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31935 \begin_layout Subsection
31939 \begin_layout Standard
31940 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31941 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31943 activate the option
31946 \begin_inset space ~
31953 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31959 \begin_inset space ~
31963 \begin_inset space ~
31966 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31973 \begin_inset space ~
31986 \begin_inset space ~
31991 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31994 \begin_layout Standard
31995 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32000 \begin_inset space ~
32008 \begin_inset space ~
32016 \begin_layout Standard
32017 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
32018 and when you finish
32022 \begin_layout Standard
32023 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32031 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32032 generated by activating the option
32035 \begin_inset space ~
32041 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32049 \begin_layout Subsection
32050 Selected document parts
32053 \begin_layout Standard
32054 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32055 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32056 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32057 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32059 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32065 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32066 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32067 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32070 \begin_layout Standard
32071 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32078 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32090 is explained in section
32092 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32097 \begin_inset space ~
32107 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32108 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32109 the final rotated boxes,
32110 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32111 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32113 Here is the result:
32116 \begin_layout Standard
32117 \begin_inset Preview
32119 \begin_layout Standard
32124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32128 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32134 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32144 height_special "totalheight"
32149 backgroundcolor "none"
32152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32177 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32183 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32205 \begin_layout Standard
32206 Previewing works also for colors.
32207 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32226 is explained in section
32233 \begin_inset space ~
32246 \begin_layout Standard
32247 \begin_inset Preview
32249 \begin_layout Standard
32253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32272 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32277 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32296 \begin_layout Standard
32297 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32303 \begin_layout Standard
32304 If \SpecialChar LyX
32305 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32306 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32307 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32308 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32309 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32310 the \SpecialChar TeX
32312 If \SpecialChar LyX
32313 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32314 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32316 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32317 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32318 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32321 \begin_layout Subsection
32326 \begin_layout Standard
32327 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32328 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32331 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32333 \begin_inset space ~
32338 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32340 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32342 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32343 's main window, then only this selection
32344 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32345 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32346 the source view window.
32351 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32352 ; but note that if you have
32353 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32355 not just the one which is open at the time.
32358 \begin_layout Section
32359 Advanced Find and Replace
32360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32362 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32367 \begin_inset Index idx
32370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32377 \begin_inset Index idx
32380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32389 \begin_layout Subsection
32393 \begin_layout Standard
32394 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32395 allows for searching of complex,
32396 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32398 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32399 The key-features are:
32402 \begin_layout Itemize
32403 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32404 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32405 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32409 \begin_layout Itemize
32410 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32411 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32412 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32413 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32416 \begin_layout Itemize
32417 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32418 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32419 outside of mathematics environments
32422 \begin_layout Itemize
32423 Search may be widened to a specific
32428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32432 \begin_inset space ~
32435 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32436 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32443 \begin_layout Itemize
32444 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32445 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32450 \begin_inset space ~
32453 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32456 \begin_layout Subsection
32460 \begin_layout Standard
32461 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32463 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32476 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32479 ) or the toolbar button
32482 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32488 Advanced Find and Replace
32493 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32497 \begin_layout Standard
32503 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32507 \begin_inset space ~
32512 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32515 arg "paragraph-break"
32519 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32520 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32524 arg "paragraph-break"
32527 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32531 searches backwards.
32534 \begin_layout Standard
32538 \begin_inset space ~
32543 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32552 \begin_inset space ~
32557 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32561 Searching for mathematics
32564 \begin_layout Standard
32565 Mathematical formulas, such as
32566 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32569 or something more complex like
32570 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32573 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32578 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32579 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32580 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32581 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
32587 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32591 \begin_layout Standard
32592 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32593 This is done by switching to the
32597 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32602 This way, entering in the
32609 \begin_layout Itemize
32610 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32611 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32614 \begin_layout Itemize
32615 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32616 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32619 \begin_layout Itemize
32620 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32621 of it only within section headings.
32622 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32623 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32627 \begin_layout Itemize
32628 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32629 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32632 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32636 \begin_layout Standard
32637 The entries made in the
32641 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32644 \begin_inset space ~
32650 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32654 button or alternatively press
32657 arg "paragraph-break"
32664 while the cursor is in the
32667 \begin_inset space ~
32675 \begin_layout Standard
32676 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32678 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32682 \begin_layout Itemize
32683 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32684 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32692 with its typewriter version
32693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32707 \begin_layout Itemize
32708 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32714 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32726 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32733 (you may want to enable the
32736 \begin_inset space ~
32744 \begin_inset space ~
32749 options and disable the
32757 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32765 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32766 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32770 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32773 , or occurrences of
32774 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32778 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32784 \begin_layout Subsection
32788 \begin_layout Standard
32789 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32794 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32796 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32798 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32807 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32813 This is done with the context menu
32815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32816 Insert Regular Expression
32818 while the cursor is in the
32823 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32824 expression matching rules
32828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32829 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32832 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32836 \begin_inset space ~
32839 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32840 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32846 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32847 same text in the document.
32848 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32849 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32852 \begin_layout Enumerate
32853 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32858 editor the fraction
32859 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32863 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32866 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32867 fractions with the given denominator.
32870 \begin_layout Enumerate
32871 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32883 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32888 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32889 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32890 Also, by inserting a
32891 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32894 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32895 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32898 \begin_layout Standard
32899 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32900 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32901 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32904 , and referring back to them through
32905 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32909 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32913 For example, try searching with the regexp
32914 \begin_inset Newline newline
32917 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32920 \begin_inset Newline newline
32923 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32926 \begin_layout Standard
32927 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32930 \begin_layout Standard
32931 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32939 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32940 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32941 sub-expressions is absolute.
32943 \begin_inset space ~
32947 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32950 always refers to the first occurrence of
32951 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32954 in all entered regexps.
32962 \begin_layout Section
32964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32966 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32971 \begin_inset Index idx
32974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32983 \begin_layout Standard
32985 has a built-in spell checker.
32988 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32995 key or the toolbar button
32998 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
33001 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
33002 beginning of the currently selected text.
33003 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
33004 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
33005 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
33006 scrolled so that it is visible.
33007 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
33008 n, if any could be found.
33009 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
33013 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
33014 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
33017 \begin_layout Standard
33018 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
33021 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33025 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33026 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33028 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33029 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33032 \begin_inset space ~
33040 arg "dialog-show character"
33043 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33045 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33048 \begin_layout Standard
33049 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33050 can be downloaded from here:
33051 \begin_inset Newline newline
33055 \begin_inset Flex URL
33058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33060 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33066 \begin_inset Newline newline
33070 \begin_inset space ~
33073 files for each language.
33074 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33075 \begin_inset space ~
33078 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33079 's installation subfolder
33087 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33089 \begin_inset Newline newline
33092 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33093 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33094 but in most cases these are
33110 is the language code.
33113 \begin_layout Subsection
33117 \begin_layout Standard
33120 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33121 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33123 \begin_inset space ~
33126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33129 you can set the following things:
33132 \begin_layout Description
33134 \begin_inset space ~
33137 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33138 should use for spell checking.
33139 Depending on your platform,
33153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33154 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33155 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33170 \begin_inset space ~
33173 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33176 \begin_layout Description
33178 \begin_inset space ~
33181 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33182 will always use the given language
33183 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33186 \begin_layout Description
33188 \begin_inset space ~
33191 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33197 \begin_inset space \space{}
33201 This should normally not be needed.
33204 \begin_layout Description
33206 \begin_inset space ~
33210 \begin_inset space ~
33213 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33225 \begin_layout Description
33227 \begin_inset space ~
33230 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33231 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33232 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33233 appear in a context menu.
33234 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33238 \begin_layout Description
33240 \begin_inset space ~
33244 \begin_inset space ~
33248 \begin_inset space ~
33251 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33255 \begin_layout Section
33257 \begin_inset Index idx
33260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33269 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33276 \begin_layout Standard
33278 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33279 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33289 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33291 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33300 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33302 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33303 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33304 which are available for many languages.
33307 \begin_layout Standard
33308 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33309 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33313 \begin_layout Subsection
33314 Setting up the thesaurus
33317 \begin_layout Standard
33326 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33330 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33335 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33341 \begin_inset space ~
33349 For instance, the US English files are named:
33352 \begin_layout Itemize
33356 \begin_layout Itemize
33360 \begin_layout Standard
33369 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33370 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33373 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33374 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33375 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33377 \begin_inset space ~
33382 ) to the path where they are installed.
33386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33387 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33388 ies, typical locations are
33394 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33398 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33402 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33405 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33411 LibreOffice-<Version>
33418 On the Mac, the default location is
33420 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33421 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33422 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33423 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33424 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33425 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33433 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33434 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33435 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33439 \begin_layout Standard
33440 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33441 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33445 \begin_layout Itemize
33446 \begin_inset Flex URL
33449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33451 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33459 \begin_layout Standard
33460 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33461 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33463 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33464 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33465 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33467 \begin_inset space ~
33472 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33474 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33475 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33479 \begin_layout Standard
33480 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33482 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33485 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33491 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33494 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33495 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33503 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33504 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33505 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33507 \begin_inset space ~
33512 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33515 \begin_layout Subsection
33516 Using the thesaurus
33519 \begin_layout Standard
33520 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33522 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33525 or the toolbar button
33528 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33531 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33533 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33535 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33536 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33537 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33546 ), related terms (such as
33549 \begin_inset space ~
33558 ), compounds (such as
33561 \begin_inset space ~
33570 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33579 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33582 \begin_layout Standard
33583 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33584 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33588 \begin_layout Standard
33589 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33590 the dictionary, such as the above
33594 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33599 \begin_inset space \space{}
33602 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33603 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33604 For example, looking up the word form
33608 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33613 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33618 \begin_inset space \space{}
33629 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33630 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33631 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33634 \begin_layout Section
33636 \begin_inset Index idx
33639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33646 \begin_inset Index idx
33649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33650 Document ! Change Tracking
33656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33658 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33665 \begin_layout Standard
33666 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33667 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33668 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33669 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33671 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33673 \begin_inset space ~
33676 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33678 \begin_inset space ~
33686 \begin_layout Standard
33687 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33701 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33702 You can change the color in
33704 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33705 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33707 \begin_inset space ~
33711 \begin_inset space ~
33716 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33722 \begin_inset Index idx
33725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33726 Color ! Change tracking
33731 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33732 's status bar when the
33733 cursor is in changed text.
33734 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33737 arg "changes-merge"
33743 \begin_layout Standard
33744 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33746 \begin_inset Index idx
33749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33758 \begin_layout Standard
33759 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33765 \begin_layout Standard
33766 \begin_inset Graphics
33767 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33775 \begin_layout Standard
33776 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33782 \begin_layout Standard
33783 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33786 \begin_layout Standard
33787 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33793 \begin_layout Standard
33794 \begin_inset Tabular
33795 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33796 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33797 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33798 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33808 arg "changes-track"
33816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33822 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33824 \begin_inset space ~
33827 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33829 \begin_inset space ~
33838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33847 arg "changes-output"
33855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33861 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33863 \begin_inset space ~
33866 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33868 \begin_inset space ~
33872 \begin_inset space ~
33876 \begin_inset space ~
33885 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33906 Jumps to the next change
33912 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33921 arg "change-accept"
33929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33935 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33937 \begin_inset space ~
33940 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33942 \begin_inset space ~
33951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33960 arg "change-reject"
33968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33974 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33976 \begin_inset space ~
33979 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33981 \begin_inset space ~
33990 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33999 arg "changes-merge"
34007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34013 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34015 \begin_inset space ~
34018 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34020 \begin_inset space ~
34029 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34038 arg "all-changes-accept"
34046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34054 \begin_inset space ~
34057 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34059 \begin_inset space ~
34063 \begin_inset space ~
34072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34081 arg "all-changes-reject"
34089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34095 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34097 \begin_inset space ~
34100 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34102 \begin_inset space ~
34106 \begin_inset space ~
34115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34139 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34141 \begin_inset space ~
34150 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34173 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34175 \begin_inset space ~
34191 \begin_layout Standard
34192 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34198 \begin_layout Standard
34199 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34219 \begin_layout Standard
34220 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34221 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34222 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34223 the next change after the current cursor position.
34224 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34225 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34226 step to the next change.
34227 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34230 \begin_layout Standard
34231 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34232 to describe a change.
34235 \begin_layout Standard
34236 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34242 \begin_inset Index idx
34245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34247 -packages ! dvipost
34253 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34255 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34261 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34265 \begin_layout Section
34266 Comparison of Documents
34267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34269 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34274 \begin_inset Index idx
34277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34278 Comparison of documents
34286 \begin_layout Standard
34287 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34290 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34294 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34295 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34297 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34299 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34303 \begin_inset space ~
34307 \begin_inset space ~
34311 \begin_inset space ~
34320 \begin_inset space ~
34324 \begin_inset space ~
34328 \begin_inset space ~
34332 \begin_inset space ~
34336 \begin_inset space ~
34340 \begin_inset space ~
34345 enables the change tracking option
34348 \begin_inset space ~
34352 \begin_inset space ~
34356 \begin_inset space ~
34361 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34364 \begin_layout Section
34365 International Support
34366 \begin_inset Index idx
34369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34370 International support
34378 \begin_layout Standard
34379 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34380 with any language you want.
34381 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34382 up \SpecialChar LyX
34384 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34386 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34393 \begin_layout Standard
34394 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34395 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34396 \begin_inset space ~
34400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34402 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34409 \begin_layout Subsection
34411 \begin_inset Index idx
34414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34421 \begin_inset Index idx
34424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34425 Document ! Settings
34431 \begin_inset Index idx
34434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34435 Document ! Language
34443 \begin_layout Standard
34446 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34447 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34450 dialog lets you set
34452 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34457 \begin_layout Standard
34462 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34467 \begin_inset space ~
34472 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34473 For details about the different encoding options see section
34474 \begin_inset space ~
34478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34480 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34487 \begin_layout Subsection
34488 Keyboard mapping configuration
34489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34491 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34498 \begin_layout Standard
34499 If you have for example a U.
34500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34503 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34504 can use an alternate keymap.
34505 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34510 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34511 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34512 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34515 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34516 \begin_inset space ~
34520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34522 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34527 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34528 which one you want to use.
34531 \begin_layout Standard
34532 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34533 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34534 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34538 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34539 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34540 one to support the characters you want.
34541 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34548 \begin_layout Chapter
34551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34553 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34560 \begin_layout Standard
34561 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34562 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34563 topic inside the user's guide.
34566 \begin_layout Section
34568 \begin_inset Index idx
34571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34580 \begin_layout Standard
34585 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34588 \begin_layout Subsection
34592 \begin_layout Standard
34593 Creates a new document.
34596 \begin_layout Subsection
34600 \begin_layout Standard
34601 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34602 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34603 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34606 \begin_layout Subsection
34610 \begin_layout Standard
34614 \begin_layout Subsection
34618 \begin_layout Standard
34619 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34620 Click there on a file to open it.
34623 \begin_layout Subsection
34627 \begin_layout Standard
34628 Closes the current document.
34631 \begin_layout Subsection
34635 \begin_layout Standard
34636 Closes all opened documents.
34639 \begin_layout Subsection
34643 \begin_layout Standard
34644 Saves the actual document.
34647 \begin_layout Subsection
34651 \begin_layout Standard
34652 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34655 \begin_layout Subsection
34659 \begin_layout Standard
34660 Saves all opened documents.
34663 \begin_layout Subsection
34667 \begin_layout Standard
34668 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34671 \begin_layout Subsection
34675 \begin_layout Standard
34676 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34677 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34678 It is described in the section
34680 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34685 Additional Features
34690 \begin_layout Subsection
34694 \begin_layout Standard
34695 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34696 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34698 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34699 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34703 \begin_layout Standard
34704 When using the menu entry
34707 \begin_inset space ~
34712 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34716 \begin_inset space ~
34720 \begin_inset space ~
34724 \begin_inset space ~
34729 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34730 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34733 \begin_layout Subsection
34735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34737 name "subsec:Export"
34744 \begin_layout Standard
34745 You can export your document to various file formats.
34746 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34748 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34749 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34750 during its configuration.
34753 \begin_layout Standard
34754 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34756 \begin_inset space ~
34760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34762 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34769 \begin_layout Description
34775 \begin_inset space ~
34778 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34780 \begin_inset space ~
34783 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34784 \begin_inset Newline newline
34787 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34788 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34792 \begin_layout Description
34793 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34799 \begin_layout Description
34801 \begin_inset space ~
34804 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34810 \begin_layout Description
34811 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34812 's native DVI-format.
34813 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34814 files paths or file names in your document.
34816 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34823 \begin_layout Description
34824 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34825 in files paths or file names
34828 \begin_layout Description
34830 \begin_inset space ~
34837 ) DVI-format using the program
34839 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34842 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34846 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34854 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34862 \begin_layout Description
34864 \begin_inset space ~
34867 (cropped) the same as
34871 but with cropped page margins.
34874 \begin_layout Description
34876 \begin_inset space ~
34879 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34883 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34888 \begin_layout Description
34892 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34900 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34908 \begin_layout Description
34910 \begin_inset space ~
34914 \begin_inset space ~
34917 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34921 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34929 \begin_layout Description
34933 \begin_inset space ~
34942 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34943 source that is compilable with the program
34945 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34949 \begin_layout Description
34953 \begin_inset space ~
34958 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34959 source, additionally all images used in the document
34960 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34964 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34967 \begin_layout Description
34971 \begin_inset space ~
34976 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34977 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34978 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34986 \begin_layout Description
34990 \begin_inset space ~
34999 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35000 source that is compilable with the program
35006 \begin_layout Description
35008 \begin_inset space ~
35012 \begin_inset space ~
35019 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35020 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35026 \begin_layout Description
35028 \begin_inset space ~
35031 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35032 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35038 \begin_inset space \space{}
35043 \begin_inset space ~
35047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35062 represent the version number)
35065 \begin_layout Description
35067 \begin_inset space ~
35071 \begin_inset space ~
35074 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35075 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35076 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35080 \begin_layout Description
35081 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35082 's internal XHTML engine
35085 \begin_layout Description
35087 \begin_inset space ~
35091 \begin_inset space ~
35095 \begin_inset space ~
35099 \begin_inset space ~
35102 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35107 For the conversion the program
35116 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35119 \begin_layout Description
35120 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35125 \begin_layout Description
35127 \begin_inset space ~
35130 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35132 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35135 For the conversion the program
35144 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35147 \begin_layout Description
35149 \begin_inset space ~
35152 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35153 For the conversion the program
35162 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35165 \begin_layout Description
35167 \begin_inset space ~
35170 (cropped) the same as
35173 \begin_inset space ~
35178 but with cropped page margins
35181 \begin_layout Description
35185 \begin_inset space ~
35190 PDF-format using the program
35194 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35197 \begin_layout Description
35201 \begin_inset space ~
35205 \begin_inset space ~
35213 \begin_inset space ~
35218 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35223 \begin_inset space \space{}
35226 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35230 \begin_layout Description
35234 \begin_inset space ~
35239 PDF-format using the program
35241 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35244 , produces PDF-files directly
35247 \begin_layout Description
35251 \begin_inset space ~
35256 PDF-format using the program
35260 , produces PDF-files directly
35263 \begin_layout Description
35267 \begin_inset space ~
35272 PDF-format using the program
35276 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35279 \begin_layout Description
35283 \begin_inset space ~
35288 PDF-format using the program
35293 , produces PDF-files directly
35296 \begin_layout Description
35300 \begin_inset space ~
35308 \begin_layout Description
35312 \begin_inset space ~
35316 \begin_inset space ~
35321 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35322 and then exported as text using the program
35327 \begin_layout Description
35332 PostScript format using the program
35340 options see section
35341 \begin_inset space ~
35345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35347 reference "subsec:General-output"
35354 \begin_layout Description
35355 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35356 source and also code in the statistical programming
35370 it is possible to use
35374 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35378 \begin_layout Standard
35379 If one of the menu entries
35386 \begin_inset space ~
35395 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35397 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35399 \begin_inset space ~
35403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35405 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35410 \begin_inset Index idx
35413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35414 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35423 \begin_layout Subsection
35427 \begin_layout Standard
35428 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35429 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35432 \begin_inset space ~
35436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35438 reference "sec:Paths"
35443 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35452 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35453 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35454 's preferences as described in section
35455 \begin_inset space ~
35459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35461 reference "subsec:Converters"
35468 \begin_layout Subsection
35469 New and Close Window
35472 \begin_layout Standard
35473 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35477 \begin_layout Subsection
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35485 \begin_layout Section
35487 \begin_inset Index idx
35490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35499 \begin_layout Subsection
35503 \begin_layout Standard
35504 Described in section
35505 \begin_inset space ~
35509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35511 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35518 \begin_layout Subsection
35519 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35522 \begin_layout Standard
35523 Described in section
35524 \begin_inset space ~
35528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35530 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35537 \begin_layout Subsection
35541 \begin_layout Standard
35542 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35543 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35546 \begin_layout Subsection
35550 \begin_layout Standard
35551 Selects the whole document.
35554 \begin_layout Subsection
35555 Find & Replace (Quick)
35558 \begin_layout Standard
35559 Described in section
35560 \begin_inset space ~
35564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35566 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35573 \begin_layout Subsection
35574 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35577 \begin_layout Standard
35578 Described in section
35579 \begin_inset space ~
35583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35585 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35592 \begin_layout Subsection
35593 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35596 \begin_layout Standard
35597 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35601 \begin_layout Subsection
35605 \begin_layout Standard
35606 Described in section
35607 \begin_inset space ~
35611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35613 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35620 \begin_layout Subsection
35622 \begin_inset Index idx
35625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35626 Paragraph ! Settings
35634 \begin_layout Standard
35635 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35636 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35640 \begin_layout Standard
35641 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35642 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35648 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35649 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35651 \begin_inset space ~
35659 \begin_layout Subsection
35660 Table and Rows & Columns
35663 \begin_layout Standard
35664 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35665 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35666 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35669 \begin_layout Subsection
35673 \begin_layout Standard
35674 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35675 It will dissolve this inset.
35676 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35680 \begin_layout Subsection
35684 \begin_layout Standard
35685 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35686 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35689 \begin_layout Subsection
35690 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35693 \begin_layout Standard
35694 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35696 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35697 \begin_inset space ~
35701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35703 reference "sec:Nesting"
35708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35710 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35717 \begin_layout Subsection
35720 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35723 \begin_layout Standard
35724 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35725 nts of the same type.
35727 \begin_inset space ~
35731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35733 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35737 for an explanation.
35740 \begin_layout Section
35742 \begin_inset Index idx
35745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35754 \begin_layout Standard
35755 At the bottom of the
35759 menu the opened documents are listed.
35762 \begin_layout Subsection
35763 Open/Close all Insets
35766 \begin_layout Standard
35767 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35770 \begin_layout Subsection
35771 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35774 \begin_layout Standard
35775 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35778 \begin_layout Standard
35779 Math macros are described in the
35786 \begin_layout Subsection
35790 \begin_layout Standard
35791 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35792 \begin_inset space ~
35796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35798 reference "sec:Navigating"
35803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35805 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35812 \begin_layout Subsection
35816 \begin_layout Standard
35817 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35819 \begin_inset space ~
35823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35825 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35832 \begin_layout Subsection
35836 \begin_layout Standard
35837 Opens a window showing console messages.
35838 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35843 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35844 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35845 is processing the document.
35848 \begin_layout Subsection
35850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35852 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35857 \begin_inset Index idx
35860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35869 \begin_layout Standard
35870 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35871 All toolbars and the
35874 \begin_inset space ~
35879 can be turned on and off.
35884 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35896 \begin_inset space ~
35908 \begin_inset space ~
35913 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35917 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35924 \begin_layout Standard
35929 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35933 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35934 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35935 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35936 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35937 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35940 \begin_layout Standard
35942 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35943 \begin_inset space ~
35947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35949 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35956 \begin_layout Subsection
35960 \begin_layout Standard
35964 \begin_inset space ~
35968 \begin_inset space ~
35972 \begin_inset space ~
35976 \begin_inset space ~
35980 \begin_inset space ~
35984 \begin_inset space ~
35989 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35990 's main window vertically while
35993 \begin_inset space ~
35997 \begin_inset space ~
36001 \begin_inset space ~
36005 \begin_inset space ~
36009 \begin_inset space ~
36013 \begin_inset space ~
36018 will split it horizontally.
36019 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
36020 to view the same document, but at different positions.
36021 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
36022 three or more documents at the same time.
36023 To close a split view, use the menu
36026 \begin_inset space ~
36030 \begin_inset space ~
36038 \begin_layout Subsection
36042 \begin_layout Standard
36043 Closes a split view.
36046 \begin_layout Subsection
36050 \begin_layout Standard
36051 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36052 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36053 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36054 's main window fullscreen.
36055 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36056 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36059 \begin_layout Section
36061 \begin_inset Index idx
36064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36073 \begin_layout Subsection
36077 \begin_layout Standard
36078 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36079 \begin_inset space ~
36083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36085 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36096 \begin_layout Subsection
36098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36100 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36107 \begin_layout Standard
36108 Here you can insert the following characters:
36111 \begin_layout Description
36116 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36119 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36120 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36121 -packages you have installed.
36122 You can get a complete display by checking
36125 \begin_inset space ~
36131 \begin_inset Newline newline
36135 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36143 Not all characters will be visible in the
36147 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36148 dialog (see section
36149 \begin_inset space ~
36153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36155 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36159 ) can display every character.
36167 \begin_layout Description
36168 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36172 \begin_layout Description
36174 \begin_inset space ~
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36181 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36182 \begin_inset space ~
36186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36188 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36195 \begin_layout Description
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36200 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36203 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36204 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36210 \begin_layout Description
36212 \begin_inset space ~
36215 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36219 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36225 \begin_layout Description
36227 \begin_inset space ~
36230 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36234 \begin_layout Description
36236 \begin_inset space ~
36239 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36243 \begin_layout Description
36245 \begin_inset space ~
36248 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36254 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36260 \begin_layout Description
36262 \begin_inset space ~
36265 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36269 \begin_layout Description
36271 \begin_inset space ~
36275 \begin_inset Index idx
36278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36285 \begin_inset Index idx
36288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36289 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36294 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36295 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36297 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36303 \begin_inset Index idx
36306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36314 \begin_inset Newline newline
36317 More information about this feature can be found in the
36323 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36329 \begin_layout Description
36330 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36332 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36333 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36337 \begin_layout Subsection
36341 \begin_layout Standard
36342 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36345 \begin_layout Description
36346 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36347 \begin_inset script superscript
36349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36358 \begin_layout Description
36359 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36360 \begin_inset script subscript
36362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36371 \begin_layout Description
36373 \begin_inset space ~
36376 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36377 \begin_inset space ~
36381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36383 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36390 \begin_layout Description
36392 \begin_inset space ~
36395 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36396 \begin_inset space ~
36400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36402 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36409 \begin_layout Description
36411 \begin_inset space ~
36414 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36415 \begin_inset space ~
36419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36421 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36428 \begin_layout Description
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36433 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36439 \begin_inset space \space{}
36442 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36443 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36452 To insert a fraction use the command
36457 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36461 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36470 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36477 \begin_layout Description
36479 \begin_inset space ~
36482 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36483 \begin_inset space ~
36487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36489 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36496 \begin_layout Description
36498 \begin_inset space ~
36501 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36502 \begin_inset space ~
36506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36508 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36515 \begin_layout Description
36517 \begin_inset space ~
36520 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36521 \begin_inset space ~
36525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36527 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36534 \begin_layout Description
36535 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36536 \begin_inset space ~
36540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36542 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36549 \begin_layout Description
36551 \begin_inset space ~
36554 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36555 \begin_inset space ~
36559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36561 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36568 \begin_layout Description
36570 \begin_inset space ~
36573 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36574 \begin_inset space ~
36578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36580 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36587 \begin_layout Description
36589 \begin_inset space ~
36593 \begin_inset space ~
36596 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36597 \begin_inset space ~
36601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36603 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36610 \begin_layout Description
36612 \begin_inset space ~
36615 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36616 as described in section
36617 \begin_inset space ~
36621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36623 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36630 \begin_layout Description
36632 \begin_inset space ~
36635 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36636 \begin_inset space ~
36640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36642 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36649 \begin_layout Description
36651 \begin_inset space ~
36654 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36655 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36657 \begin_inset space ~
36661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36663 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36670 \begin_layout Description
36672 \begin_inset space ~
36675 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36676 \begin_inset space ~
36680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36682 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36689 \begin_layout Description
36691 \begin_inset space ~
36695 \begin_inset space ~
36698 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36699 \begin_inset space ~
36703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36705 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36712 \begin_layout Subsection
36716 \begin_layout Standard
36717 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36721 \begin_inset space ~
36742 are described in section
36743 \begin_inset space ~
36747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36749 reference "sec:toc"
36758 is described in section
36759 \begin_inset space ~
36763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36765 reference "sec:Index"
36773 is described in section
36774 \begin_inset space ~
36778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36780 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36786 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36789 is described in section
36790 \begin_inset space ~
36794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36796 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36803 \begin_layout Subsection
36807 \begin_layout Standard
36808 To insert floats, as described in section
36809 \begin_inset space ~
36813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36815 reference "sec:Floats"
36819 and in detail the chapter
36826 \begin_inset space ~
36834 \begin_layout Subsection
36838 \begin_layout Standard
36839 To insert notes, described in section
36840 \begin_inset space ~
36844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36846 reference "sec:Notes"
36853 \begin_layout Subsection
36857 \begin_layout Standard
36858 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36860 Branches are described in section
36861 \begin_inset space ~
36865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36867 reference "sec:Branches"
36874 \begin_layout Subsection
36878 \begin_layout Standard
36879 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36880 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36882 An example is the document class
36883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36890 with three custom insets.
36893 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36897 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36903 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36906 \begin_layout Subsection
36908 \begin_inset Index idx
36911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36920 \begin_layout Standard
36921 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36923 For more information see chapter
36925 External Document Parts
36928 \begin_inset space ~
36934 \begin_layout Subsection
36936 \begin_inset Index idx
36939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36948 \begin_layout Standard
36949 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36950 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36957 \begin_inset space ~
36965 \begin_layout Subsection
36969 \begin_layout Standard
36974 dialog as described in section
36975 \begin_inset space ~
36979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36981 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36988 \begin_layout Subsection
36992 \begin_layout Standard
36997 as described in section
36998 \begin_inset space ~
37002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37004 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37011 \begin_layout Subsection
37015 \begin_layout Standard
37020 as described in section
37021 \begin_inset space ~
37025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37027 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37034 \begin_layout Subsection
37036 \begin_inset Index idx
37039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37046 \begin_inset Index idx
37049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37050 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
37058 \begin_layout Standard
37059 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
37060 Floats are described in section
37061 \begin_inset space ~
37065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37067 reference "sec:Floats"
37071 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
37073 Multi-page Captions
37078 \begin_inset space ~
37086 \begin_layout Subsection
37090 \begin_layout Standard
37091 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37092 \begin_inset space ~
37096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37098 reference "sec:Index"
37105 \begin_layout Subsection
37109 \begin_layout Standard
37110 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37111 \begin_inset space ~
37115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37117 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37124 \begin_layout Subsection
37128 \begin_layout Standard
37129 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37130 Tables are described in section
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37137 reference "sec:Tables"
37141 and in detail in the chapter
37148 \begin_inset space ~
37156 \begin_layout Subsection
37160 \begin_layout Standard
37166 Graphics are described in section
37167 \begin_inset space ~
37171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37173 reference "sec:Graphics"
37180 \begin_layout Subsection
37184 \begin_layout Standard
37185 Inserts a URL as described in section
37186 \begin_inset space ~
37190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37192 reference "subsec:URLs"
37199 \begin_layout Subsection
37203 \begin_layout Standard
37204 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37205 \begin_inset space ~
37209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37211 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37218 \begin_layout Subsection
37222 \begin_layout Standard
37223 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37224 \begin_inset space ~
37228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37230 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37237 \begin_layout Subsection
37241 \begin_layout Standard
37242 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37243 \begin_inset space ~
37247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37249 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37256 \begin_layout Subsection
37260 \begin_layout Standard
37261 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37262 title or caption of a float.
37263 Inserts a short title as described in section
37264 \begin_inset space ~
37268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37270 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37277 \begin_layout Subsection
37282 \begin_layout Standard
37283 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37284 Code box as described in section
37285 \begin_inset space ~
37289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37291 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37298 \begin_layout Subsection
37300 \begin_inset Index idx
37303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37312 \begin_layout Standard
37313 Inserts a program listings box.
37314 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37316 Program Code Listings
37321 \begin_inset space ~
37329 \begin_layout Subsection
37333 \begin_layout Standard
37334 Inserts the actual date.
37335 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37339 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37347 \begin_inset space ~
37355 \begin_layout Subsection
37359 \begin_layout Standard
37360 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37361 \begin_inset space ~
37365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37367 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37374 \begin_layout Section
37376 \begin_inset Index idx
37379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37388 \begin_layout Standard
37389 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37390 \begin_inset space ~
37393 of the current document.
37394 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37397 \begin_layout Subsection
37401 \begin_layout Standard
37402 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37403 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37404 to jump, for example, between section
37405 \begin_inset space ~
37409 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37410 \begin_inset space ~
37413 2.5 and use the submenu
37416 \begin_inset space ~
37420 \begin_inset space ~
37427 \begin_inset space ~
37433 \begin_inset space ~
37437 \begin_inset space ~
37443 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37447 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37453 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37456 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37459 \begin_layout Standard
37460 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37464 \begin_inset space ~
37469 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37472 \begin_inset space ~
37477 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37480 \begin_layout Subsection
37481 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37484 \begin_layout Standard
37485 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37489 \begin_layout Subsection
37493 \begin_layout Standard
37494 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37495 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37496 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37500 \begin_inset space ~
37504 \begin_inset space ~
37512 \begin_layout Subsection
37516 \begin_layout Standard
37517 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37520 The \SpecialChar LyX
37521 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37531 \begin_inset space ~
37536 manual for a detailed description.
37539 \begin_layout Section
37541 \begin_inset Index idx
37544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37553 \begin_layout Subsection
37557 \begin_layout Standard
37558 Change Tracking is described in section
37559 \begin_inset space ~
37563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37565 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37572 \begin_layout Subsection
37580 \begin_layout Standard
37581 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37582 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37583 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37585 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37586 to the clipboard or update the view.
37587 \begin_inset Newline newline
37590 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37594 \begin_layout Standard
37597 Open Containing Directory
37599 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37600 's temporary folder for the document.
37601 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37602 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37603 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37604 For example some journals require to send the
37608 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37612 \begin_layout Subsection
37613 Start Appendix Here
37616 \begin_layout Standard
37617 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37618 as described in section
37619 \begin_inset space ~
37623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37625 reference "sec:Appendices"
37632 \begin_layout Subsection
37634 \begin_inset space ~
37640 \begin_layout Standard
37641 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37642 default output format for the document (menu
37644 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37645 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37646 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37648 \begin_inset space ~
37652 \begin_inset space ~
37658 \begin_inset space ~
37662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37664 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
37668 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37671 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37672 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37674 \begin_inset space ~
37677 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37679 \begin_inset space ~
37682 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37684 \begin_inset space ~
37688 \begin_inset space ~
37694 \begin_inset space ~
37698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37700 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37704 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37705 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37707 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37708 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37710 \begin_inset space ~
37713 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37715 \begin_inset space ~
37718 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37722 \begin_inset space ~
37726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37728 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37733 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37734 when it is first configured.
37735 The default output format is
37738 \begin_inset space ~
37746 \begin_layout Subsection
37747 View (Other Formats)
37750 \begin_layout Standard
37751 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37752 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37753 actual document with an external program.
37754 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37755 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37756 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37758 All possible formats are listed in section
37759 \begin_inset space ~
37763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37765 reference "subsec:Export"
37770 You should at least see the menu entry
37775 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37777 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37779 \begin_inset space ~
37783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37785 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37790 \begin_inset Index idx
37793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37794 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37803 \begin_layout Standard
37804 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37805 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37807 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37808 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37810 \begin_inset space ~
37813 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37815 \begin_inset space ~
37818 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37822 \begin_inset space ~
37826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37828 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37833 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37834 when it is first configured.
37837 \begin_layout Subsection
37839 \begin_inset space ~
37845 \begin_layout Standard
37846 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37847 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37850 \begin_layout Subsection
37851 Update (Other Formats)
37854 \begin_layout Standard
37855 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37856 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37859 \begin_layout Subsection
37860 View Master Document
37863 \begin_layout Standard
37864 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37880 \begin_inset space ~
37885 manual for more information on this topic).
37886 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37887 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37891 \begin_inset space ~
37895 \begin_inset space ~
37900 generates the output of the whole book, while
37904 will just output the chapter alone.
37907 \begin_layout Standard
37908 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37909 in the document settings (menu
37911 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37912 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37913 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37915 \begin_inset space ~
37919 \begin_inset space ~
37925 \begin_inset space ~
37929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37931 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
37935 ) or in the preferences (menu
37937 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37938 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37940 \begin_inset space ~
37943 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37945 \begin_inset space ~
37948 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37950 \begin_inset space ~
37954 \begin_inset space ~
37960 \begin_inset space ~
37964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37966 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37973 \begin_layout Subsection
37974 Update Master Document
37977 \begin_layout Standard
37978 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37994 \begin_inset space ~
37999 manual for more information on this topic).
38000 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
38001 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
38004 \begin_layout Standard
38005 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38006 in the document settings (menu
38008 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38009 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38010 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38012 \begin_inset space ~
38016 \begin_inset space ~
38022 \begin_inset space ~
38026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38028 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
38032 ) or in the preferences (menu
38034 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38035 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38037 \begin_inset space ~
38040 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38042 \begin_inset space ~
38045 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38047 \begin_inset space ~
38051 \begin_inset space ~
38057 \begin_inset space ~
38061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38063 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38070 \begin_layout Subsection
38072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38074 name "subsec:Compressed"
38081 \begin_layout Standard
38082 Un/compresses the current document.
38083 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
38084 compression (see the
38086 Additional Features
38088 manual for details).
38091 \begin_layout Subsection
38095 \begin_layout Standard
38096 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38099 \begin_layout Subsection
38103 \begin_layout Standard
38104 The document settings are described in appendix
38105 \begin_inset space ~
38109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38111 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38118 \begin_layout Section
38120 \begin_inset Index idx
38123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38132 \begin_layout Subsection
38136 \begin_layout Standard
38137 Spell checking is explained in section
38138 \begin_inset space ~
38142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38144 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38151 \begin_layout Subsection
38155 \begin_layout Standard
38156 The thesaurus is described in section
38157 \begin_inset space ~
38161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38163 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38170 \begin_layout Subsection
38172 \begin_inset Index idx
38175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38182 \begin_inset Index idx
38185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38194 \begin_layout Standard
38195 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38196 the highlighted document part.
38199 \begin_layout Subsection
38205 \begin_inset Index idx
38208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38209 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38218 \begin_layout Standard
38219 Generates with the help of the program
38221 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38224 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38225 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38226 This feature is not available on Windows.
38229 \begin_layout Subsection
38235 \begin_inset Index idx
38238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38248 \begin_layout Standard
38249 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38254 \begin_inset space ~
38259 to see the full filename paths.
38262 \begin_layout Subsection
38264 \begin_inset Index idx
38267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38276 \begin_layout Standard
38277 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38278 files as described in section
38279 \begin_inset space ~
38283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38285 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38292 \begin_layout Subsection
38294 \begin_inset Index idx
38297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38310 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38328 \begin_inset Index idx
38331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38332 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38341 \begin_layout Standard
38342 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38343 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38344 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38345 -packages and programs it needs; see
38347 \begin_inset space ~
38351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38353 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38360 \begin_layout Subsection
38364 \begin_layout Standard
38369 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38370 \begin_inset space ~
38374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38376 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38383 \begin_layout Section
38385 \begin_inset Index idx
38388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38397 \begin_layout Standard
38398 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38399 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38401 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38405 \begin_layout Standard
38409 \begin_inset space ~
38414 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38415 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38416 packages and classes found
38417 by \SpecialChar LyX
38419 \begin_inset space ~
38423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38425 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38432 \begin_layout Standard
38436 \begin_inset space ~
38441 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38446 \begin_layout Section
38448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38450 name "sec:Toolbars"
38457 \begin_layout Standard
38458 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38459 \begin_inset space ~
38463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38465 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38472 \begin_layout Standard
38473 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38474 This is described in the
38476 Additional Features
38481 \begin_layout Subsection
38483 \begin_inset Index idx
38486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38495 \begin_layout Standard
38496 \begin_inset Graphics
38497 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38505 \begin_layout Standard
38506 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38512 \begin_layout Standard
38513 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38530 \begin_inset Note Note
38533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38534 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38539 manual for more information.
38547 \begin_layout Standard
38548 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38554 \begin_layout Standard
38555 \begin_inset Tabular
38556 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38557 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38565 \begin_inset Graphics
38566 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38580 pull-down box for the environments
38593 \begin_layout Standard
38594 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38600 \begin_layout Standard
38602 \begin_inset Tabular
38603 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38604 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38605 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38606 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38607 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38630 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38637 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38660 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38667 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38690 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38697 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38706 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38720 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38736 arg "spelling-continuously"
38744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38748 Spellcheck continuously
38754 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38777 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38807 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38837 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38867 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38897 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38913 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38927 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38953 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38967 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38995 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
39003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39009 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39010 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
39017 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39038 Emphasize text, function of the
39040 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39042 \begin_inset space ~
39045 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39054 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39075 Set text to noun style, function of the
39077 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39079 \begin_inset space ~
39082 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39100 arg "textstyle-apply"
39108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39112 Format text using the current settings in the
39114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39116 \begin_inset space ~
39119 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39151 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39152 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39154 \begin_inset space ~
39163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39172 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39193 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39200 arg "tabular-insert"
39208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39230 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39242 Toggle outline window on/off,
39244 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39260 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39272 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39287 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39299 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39312 \begin_layout Subsection
39314 \begin_inset Index idx
39317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39326 \begin_layout Standard
39327 \begin_inset Graphics
39328 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39336 \begin_layout Standard
39337 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39343 \begin_layout Standard
39344 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39348 \begin_layout Standard
39349 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39355 \begin_layout Standard
39356 \begin_inset Tabular
39357 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39358 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39359 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39360 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39361 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39397 arg "layout Enumerate"
39405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39424 arg "layout Itemize"
39432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39469 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39478 arg "layout Description"
39486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39496 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39505 arg "depth-increment"
39513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39519 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39521 \begin_inset space ~
39525 \begin_inset space ~
39534 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39543 arg "depth-decrement"
39551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39557 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39559 \begin_inset space ~
39563 \begin_inset space ~
39572 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39581 arg "float-insert figure"
39589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39595 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39596 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39603 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39612 arg "float-insert table"
39620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39626 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39627 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39664 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39673 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39694 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39703 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39717 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39724 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39747 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39749 \begin_inset space ~
39758 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39767 arg "nomencl-insert"
39775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39783 \begin_inset space ~
39792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39801 arg "footnote-insert"
39809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39831 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39845 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39847 \begin_inset space ~
39856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39880 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39882 \begin_inset space ~
39891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39900 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39914 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39974 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39976 \begin_inset space ~
39985 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39994 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
40002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40009 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40016 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40025 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40039 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40040 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40042 \begin_inset space ~
40051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40060 arg "dialog-show character"
40068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40074 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40076 \begin_inset space ~
40079 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40086 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40095 arg "layout-paragraph"
40103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40109 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40129 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40143 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40157 \begin_layout Subsection
40158 View/Update Toolbar
40159 \begin_inset Index idx
40162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40163 Toolbar ! View / Update
40171 \begin_layout Standard
40172 \begin_inset Graphics
40173 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40180 \begin_layout Standard
40181 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40187 \begin_layout Standard
40188 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40192 \begin_layout Standard
40193 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40199 \begin_layout Standard
40200 \begin_inset Tabular
40201 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40202 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40203 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40204 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40228 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40235 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40244 arg "buffer-update"
40252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40265 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40274 arg "master-buffer-view"
40282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40288 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40290 \begin_inset space ~
40299 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40308 arg "master-buffer-update"
40316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40322 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40324 \begin_inset space ~
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40346 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40361 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40362 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40363 Synchronize with Output
40369 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40392 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40393 View (Other Formats)
40399 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40406 arg "update-others"
40414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40420 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40421 Update (Other Formats)
40434 \begin_layout Standard
40435 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40439 \begin_layout Subsection
40443 \begin_layout Standard
40444 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40445 \begin_inset space ~
40449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40451 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40455 , the table toolbar
40456 \begin_inset Index idx
40459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40468 \begin_inset space ~
40473 manual and the math macro toolbar
40474 \begin_inset Index idx
40477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40490 \begin_layout Chapter
40491 The Document Settings
40492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40494 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40499 \begin_inset Index idx
40502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40503 Document ! Settings
40511 \begin_layout Standard
40515 \begin_inset space ~
40520 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40521 is called with the menu
40523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40527 You can save your document settings as default with the
40529 Save as Document Defaults
40531 button in any dialog.
40532 This will create a template named
40536 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40537 when you create a new document without
40541 \begin_layout Standard
40546 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40547 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40550 \begin_layout Standard
40551 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40552 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40553 to find the one you are looking for.
40554 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40555 the submenus of the dialog.
40557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40561 \begin_inset space \space{}
40565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40572 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40573 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40574 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40577 \begin_layout Section
40581 \begin_layout Standard
40582 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40584 Document classes are described in section
40585 \begin_inset space ~
40589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40591 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40599 \begin_layout Standard
40603 \begin_inset space ~
40608 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40613 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40614 as a layout for a document class.
40615 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40617 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40626 \begin_layout Standard
40627 Some classes use special class options by default.
40628 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40632 and you can decide to use them or not.
40633 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40634 recommended you leave them untouched.
40639 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40640 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40645 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40647 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40653 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40654 \begin_inset Newline newline
40659 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40662 \begin_inset Newline newline
40665 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40666 distribution, see section
40671 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40673 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40685 \begin_layout Standard
40690 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40691 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40692 in the background if the child document
40693 is opened without its master.
40694 This way child documents are always compilable.
40695 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40702 \begin_inset space ~
40710 \begin_layout Standard
40711 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40722 \begin_inset Index idx
40725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40727 -packages ! prettyref
40733 \begin_inset Index idx
40736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40738 -packages ! refstyle
40743 for cross-references, see section
40744 \begin_inset space ~
40748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40750 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40757 \begin_layout Section
40761 \begin_layout Standard
40762 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40763 Please refer to the section
40766 \begin_inset space ~
40774 \begin_inset space ~
40779 manual for details.
40782 \begin_layout Section
40786 \begin_layout Standard
40787 Modules are explained in section
40788 \begin_inset space ~
40792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40794 reference "subsec:Modules"
40801 \begin_layout Section
40805 \begin_layout Standard
40807 \begin_inset space ~
40811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40813 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40820 \begin_layout Section
40824 \begin_layout Standard
40825 The document font settings are described in section
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40832 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40839 \begin_layout Section
40843 \begin_layout Standard
40844 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40856 \begin_inset space ~
40861 and whether it should be a
40864 \begin_inset space ~
40869 can also be specified here.
40872 \begin_layout Standard
40873 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40874 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40875 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40877 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40880 \begin_layout Standard
40883 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40886 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40887 justifies the text on screen.
40888 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40892 \begin_layout Section
40896 \begin_layout Standard
40897 This dialog is described in sections
40898 \begin_inset space ~
40902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40904 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40911 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40918 \begin_layout Section
40922 \begin_layout Standard
40923 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40930 reference "subsec:Margins"
40937 \begin_layout Section
40939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40941 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40946 \begin_inset Index idx
40949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40950 Language ! Encoding
40958 \begin_layout Standard
40959 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40960 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40961 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40963 is always encoded in utf8).
40964 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40965 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40966 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40967 -command is not known for
40968 a particular character).
40971 \begin_layout Standard
40972 If you use the option
40977 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40978 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40979 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40981 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40982 exactly one encoding.
40983 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40986 \begin_layout Standard
40988 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40989 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40990 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40991 installation supports Unicode), choose
40992 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40993 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40994 is quite incomplete, so
40995 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
41000 (when \SpecialChar LyX
41001 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41002 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
41003 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41004 -commands is not used, because all
41005 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
41006 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41007 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41008 , two new alternative engines
41009 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41011 Both engines support Unicode natively.
41013 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
41016 \begin_inset space ~
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41038 \begin_inset space ~
41042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41044 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41049 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41053 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41056 \begin_layout Standard
41060 \begin_inset space ~
41065 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41066 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41076 The possible settings are:
41079 \begin_layout Description
41080 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41082 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41083 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41087 \begin_inset space ~
41091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41093 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41100 \begin_layout Description
41101 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41102 format you will use.
41103 In many cases this will be
41108 \begin_inset Index idx
41111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41119 If the newer package
41124 \begin_inset Index idx
41127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41129 -packages ! polyglossia
41134 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41135 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41136 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41138 this package will be used instead of
41145 \begin_layout Description
41147 \begin_inset space ~
41158 would be more appropriate.
41161 \begin_layout Description
41162 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41163 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41167 (for German texts), type in
41170 \begin_inset Newline newline
41175 usepackage{ngerman}
41178 \begin_layout Description
41179 None will not use a language package.
41180 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41183 \begin_layout Standard
41184 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41187 \begin_layout Description
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41204 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41210 \begin_inset Index idx
41213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41215 -packages ! inputenc
41221 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41222 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41223 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41227 \begin_layout Description
41228 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41230 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41231 commands, which may result in a big
41232 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41233 -commands are needed.
41236 \begin_layout Description
41238 \begin_inset space ~
41242 \begin_inset space ~
41245 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41248 \begin_layout Description
41250 \begin_inset space ~
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41257 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41260 \begin_layout Description
41262 \begin_inset space ~
41265 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41268 \begin_layout Description
41270 \begin_inset space ~
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41277 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41278 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41281 \begin_layout Description
41283 \begin_inset space ~
41287 \begin_inset space ~
41290 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41294 \begin_layout Description
41296 \begin_inset space ~
41300 \begin_inset space ~
41303 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41304 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41307 \begin_layout Description
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41317 \begin_inset space ~
41320 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41327 \begin_layout Description
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41340 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41341 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41344 \begin_layout Description
41346 \begin_inset space ~
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41353 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41354 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41355 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41356 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41361 \begin_inset space ~
41367 \begin_layout Description
41369 \begin_inset space ~
41373 \begin_inset space ~
41376 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41377 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41378 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41380 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41381 \begin_inset space ~
41385 \begin_inset space ~
41391 \begin_layout Description
41393 \begin_inset space ~
41397 \begin_inset space ~
41400 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41403 \begin_layout Description
41405 \begin_inset space ~
41409 \begin_inset space ~
41412 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41415 \begin_layout Description
41417 \begin_inset space ~
41421 \begin_inset space ~
41424 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41427 \begin_layout Description
41429 \begin_inset space ~
41432 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41435 \begin_layout Description
41437 \begin_inset space ~
41440 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41443 \begin_layout Description
41445 \begin_inset space ~
41449 \begin_inset space ~
41452 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41455 \begin_layout Description
41457 \begin_inset space ~
41461 \begin_inset space ~
41467 \begin_layout Description
41469 \begin_inset space ~
41473 \begin_inset space ~
41476 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41479 \begin_layout Description
41481 \begin_inset space ~
41485 \begin_inset space ~
41491 \begin_layout Description
41493 \begin_inset space ~
41497 \begin_inset space ~
41500 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41506 \begin_inset Index idx
41509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41516 , when using this, set the document language to
41521 \begin_layout Description
41523 \begin_inset space ~
41527 \begin_inset space ~
41530 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41535 , when using this, set the document language to
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41544 \begin_layout Description
41546 \begin_inset space ~
41550 \begin_inset space ~
41553 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41559 \begin_inset Index idx
41562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41564 -packages ! japanese
41569 , when using this, set the document language to
41574 \begin_layout Description
41576 \begin_inset space ~
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41583 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41588 , when using this, set the document language to
41593 \begin_layout Description
41595 \begin_inset space ~
41599 \begin_inset space ~
41602 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41607 , when using this, set the document language to
41612 \begin_layout Description
41614 \begin_inset space ~
41617 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41620 \begin_layout Description
41622 \begin_inset space ~
41626 \begin_inset space ~
41630 \begin_inset space ~
41633 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41636 \begin_layout Description
41638 \begin_inset space ~
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41646 \begin_inset space ~
41649 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41650 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41651 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41654 \begin_layout Description
41656 \begin_inset space ~
41660 \begin_inset space ~
41666 \begin_layout Description
41668 \begin_inset space ~
41672 \begin_inset space ~
41675 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41676 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41679 \begin_layout Description
41681 \begin_inset space ~
41685 \begin_inset space ~
41688 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41694 \begin_inset Index idx
41697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41704 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41707 \begin_layout Description
41709 \begin_inset space ~
41717 \begin_inset space ~
41720 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41727 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41730 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41737 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41738 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41740 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41743 \begin_layout Description
41745 \begin_inset space ~
41749 \begin_inset space ~
41752 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41758 \begin_inset Index idx
41761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41768 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41771 \begin_layout Description
41773 \begin_inset space ~
41776 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41782 \begin_inset Index idx
41785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41787 -packages ! inputenc
41793 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41797 \begin_layout Description
41799 \begin_inset space ~
41803 \begin_inset space ~
41807 \begin_inset space ~
41810 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41811 \begin_inset space ~
41817 \begin_layout Description
41819 \begin_inset space ~
41823 \begin_inset space ~
41827 \begin_inset space ~
41830 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41831 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41832 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41836 \begin_layout Description
41838 \begin_inset space ~
41842 \begin_inset space ~
41846 \begin_inset space ~
41849 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41850 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41853 \begin_layout Section
41855 \begin_inset Index idx
41858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41865 \begin_inset Index idx
41868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41875 \begin_inset Index idx
41878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41879 Color ! Shaded boxes
41885 \begin_inset Index idx
41888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41889 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41897 \begin_layout Standard
41898 Here you can alter the font color for the
41902 (default: black), for
41905 \begin_inset space ~
41910 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41914 (default: white) and for
41917 \begin_inset space ~
41927 sets the color back to the default.
41930 \begin_layout Standard
41931 Clicking any button showing
41939 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41940 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41941 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41942 later more quickly.
41945 \begin_layout Standard
41946 Note, if you change the
41949 \begin_inset space ~
41954 font color and use the option
41957 \begin_inset space ~
41962 in the document settings under
41965 \begin_inset space ~
41970 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41971 \begin_inset space ~
41975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41977 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41984 \begin_layout Standard
41985 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41991 \begin_layout Standard
41995 \begin_inset space ~
42004 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
42007 \begin_inset space ~
42010 Code after a forced page break:
42013 \begin_layout Itemize
42014 For the page color:
42015 \begin_inset Newline newline
42022 pagecolor{color name}
42025 \begin_layout Itemize
42026 For the text color:
42027 \begin_inset Newline newline
42037 \begin_layout Standard
42038 You are restricted to one of
42074 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42081 \begin_inset space ~
42087 \begin_inset Newline newline
42090 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42091 names to refer to them:
42094 \begin_layout Itemize
42100 \begin_inset Newline newline
42105 page_backgroundcolor
42108 \begin_layout Itemize
42112 \begin_inset space ~
42118 \begin_inset Newline newline
42126 \begin_layout Itemize
42130 \begin_inset space ~
42136 \begin_inset Newline newline
42144 \begin_layout Itemize
42148 \begin_inset space ~
42154 \begin_inset Newline newline
42162 \begin_layout Standard
42163 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42166 \begin_inset space ~
42174 \begin_inset space ~
42182 \begin_layout Section
42186 \begin_layout Standard
42187 Here you can adjust the
42191 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42195 as described in section
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42202 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42209 \begin_layout Section
42213 \begin_layout Standard
42214 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42220 \begin_inset Index idx
42223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42235 \begin_inset Index idx
42238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42240 -packages ! jurabib
42248 Sectioned bibliography
42250 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42256 \begin_inset Index idx
42259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42261 -packages ! bibtopic
42266 and you can select a
42270 for the generation of the bibliography.
42271 For a further description see section
42272 \begin_inset space ~
42276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42278 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42285 \begin_layout Section
42289 \begin_layout Standard
42290 Here you can define the
42294 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42296 \begin_inset space ~
42300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42302 reference "sec:Index"
42309 \begin_layout Section
42313 \begin_layout Standard
42314 The PDF properties are explained in section
42315 \begin_inset space ~
42319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42321 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42328 \begin_layout Section
42332 \begin_layout Standard
42333 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42334 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42340 \begin_inset Index idx
42343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42345 -packages ! amsmath
42355 \begin_inset Index idx
42358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42360 -packages ! amssymb
42370 \begin_inset Index idx
42373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42385 \begin_inset Index idx
42388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42400 \begin_inset Index idx
42403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42405 -packages ! mathdots
42415 \begin_inset Index idx
42418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42420 -packages ! mathtools
42430 \begin_inset Index idx
42433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42445 \begin_inset Index idx
42448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42450 -packages ! stackrel
42460 \begin_inset Index idx
42463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42465 -packages ! stmaryrd
42475 \begin_inset Index idx
42478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42480 -packages ! undertilde
42485 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42488 \begin_layout Description
42489 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42490 -errors in formulas,
42491 ensure that you have this enabled.
42494 \begin_layout Description
42495 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42496 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42497 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42501 \begin_layout Description
42502 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42505 \begin_inset space ~
42517 \begin_layout Description
42518 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42521 \begin_inset space ~
42533 \begin_layout Description
42534 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42545 \begin_layout Description
42546 mathtools is used for the math commands
42582 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42589 \begin_layout Description
42590 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42592 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42601 \begin_layout Description
42602 stackrel is used for the math command
42619 \begin_layout Description
42620 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42623 \begin_layout Description
42624 undertilde is used for the math command
42632 Accents for one Character
42641 \begin_layout Section
42645 \begin_layout Standard
42646 The float placement options are described in the section
42649 \begin_inset space ~
42657 \begin_inset space ~
42665 \begin_layout Section
42669 \begin_layout Standard
42670 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42672 Program Code Listings
42677 \begin_inset space ~
42685 \begin_layout Section
42689 \begin_layout Standard
42690 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42698 set to be used and set the
42703 The itemize environment is described in section
42704 \begin_inset space ~
42708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42710 reference "sec:Itemize"
42717 \begin_layout Standard
42718 You can furthermore specify a
42721 \begin_inset space ~
42726 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42727 command of the desired character.
42728 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42735 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42737 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42741 \begin_inset space \space{}
42745 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42755 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42756 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42759 \begin_layout Standard
42760 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42768 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42769 -packages in the preamble (menu
42772 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42773 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42776 \begin_inset space ~
42782 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42786 usepackage{textcomp}
42789 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42793 usepackage{amssymb}
42803 \begin_layout Section
42807 \begin_layout Standard
42808 Branches are described in section
42809 \begin_inset space ~
42813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42815 reference "sec:Branches"
42822 \begin_layout Section
42824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42826 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
42833 \begin_layout Standard
42834 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42837 \begin_layout Description
42839 \begin_inset space ~
42843 \begin_inset space ~
42846 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42866 View Master Document
42867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42874 Update Master Document
42875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42882 menu or the toolbar.
42883 The default is set in
42885 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42886 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42888 \begin_inset space ~
42891 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42895 \begin_inset space ~
42899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42901 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42908 \begin_layout Description
42910 \begin_inset space ~
42914 \begin_inset space ~
42917 Output settings for the menu
42919 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42921 \begin_inset space ~
42927 For a detailed description see section
42929 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42934 \begin_inset space ~
42942 \begin_layout Description
42944 \begin_inset space ~
42948 \begin_inset space ~
42951 Options offers settings for the export format
42959 \begin_inset space ~
42964 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42965 \begin_inset space ~
42968 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42972 \begin_inset space ~
42977 settings are described in detail in section
42979 Math Output in XHTML
42984 \begin_inset space ~
42993 \begin_inset space ~
42997 \begin_inset space ~
43002 is used for the size of equations in the output.
43005 \begin_layout Description
43007 \begin_inset space ~
43012 Save transient properties
43014 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
43015 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
43016 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
43020 \begin_layout Itemize
43021 the activation of change tracking
43024 \begin_layout Itemize
43025 the output of tracked changes
43028 \begin_layout Itemize
43029 the recording of the document directory path.
43032 \begin_layout Standard
43033 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
43034 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
43038 \begin_layout Section
43046 \begin_layout Standard
43047 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43049 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43051 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43053 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43057 \begin_layout Standard
43058 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43059 -syntax is given in section
43060 \begin_inset space ~
43064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43066 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43073 \begin_layout Chapter
43079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43081 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43086 \begin_inset Index idx
43089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43098 \begin_layout Standard
43099 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43101 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43105 It has the following submenus.
43108 \begin_layout Section
43112 \begin_layout Subsection
43116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43117 User Interface File
43118 \begin_inset Index idx
43121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43122 Customization ! of toolbars
43128 \begin_inset Index idx
43131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43132 Customization ! of menus
43140 \begin_layout Standard
43141 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43142 interface (ui) file.
43143 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43151 \begin_layout Description
43156 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43159 \begin_layout Description
43166 the menu entries in popup context menus
43169 \begin_layout Description
43174 specifies the toolbar buttons
43177 \begin_layout Standard
43178 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43179 and edit the entries.
43182 \begin_layout Standard
43183 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43195 entries must be finished with an explicit
43220 and in the case of the
43221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43233 The syntax for the entries is:
43236 \begin_layout Standard
43237 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43266 \begin_layout Standard
43268 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43271 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43272 -functions are listed in the menu
43274 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43276 \begin_inset space ~
43284 \begin_layout Standard
43285 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43291 \begin_layout Standard
43292 For example, assuming you use the menu
43294 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43297 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43302 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43326 \begin_layout Standard
43328 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43343 to have the sixth bookmark.
43346 \begin_layout Standard
43350 \begin_inset space ~
43355 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43356 's toolbar buttons.
43357 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43358 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43361 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43368 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43372 \begin_layout Standard
43375 Enable tool tips in main work area
43377 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43381 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43385 \begin_layout Standard
43390 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43391 should display in the menu
43393 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43395 \begin_inset space ~
43403 \begin_layout Subsection
43407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43411 \begin_layout Standard
43414 Restore window layouts and geometries
43417 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43418 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43422 \begin_layout Standard
43425 Restore cursor positions
43427 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43431 \begin_layout Standard
43434 Load opened files from last session
43436 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43440 \begin_layout Standard
43443 Clear all session information
43445 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43446 sessions (cursor positions, names
43447 of last opened documents, etc.).
43450 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43454 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43459 \begin_inset Index idx
43462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43471 \begin_layout Standard
43474 Backup original documents when saving
43476 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43477 it was saved the last time.
43478 It is stored in the
43481 \begin_inset space ~
43487 \begin_inset space ~
43491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43493 reference "sec:Paths"
43497 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43500 \begin_inset space ~
43506 The backup file has the file extension
43507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43521 \begin_layout Standard
43524 Backup documents, every
43526 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43529 \begin_layout Standard
43532 Save documents compressed by default
43534 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43535 \begin_inset space ~
43539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43541 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43546 This applies to newly created documents only.
43547 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43551 Windows & work area
43554 \begin_layout Standard
43557 Open documents in tabs
43559 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43563 \begin_layout Standard
43568 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43575 \begin_inset space ~
43579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43581 reference "sec:Paths"
43585 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43592 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43593 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43594 of \SpecialChar LyX
43596 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43597 instance is created for each file.
43600 \begin_layout Standard
43603 Single close-tab button
43605 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43615 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43616 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43618 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
43619 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
43625 \begin_layout Standard
43626 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43634 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43635 before the change takes effect.
43643 \begin_layout Standard
43648 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43650 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43652 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43656 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43657 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43658 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43661 \begin_layout Subsection
43663 \begin_inset Index idx
43666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43675 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43682 \begin_layout Standard
43683 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43687 \begin_layout Standard
43688 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43696 This section only deals with the fonts
43700 the \SpecialChar LyX
43702 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43705 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43706 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43717 \begin_layout Standard
43718 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43735 (depends on the system) as its
43738 \begin_inset space ~
43754 \begin_layout Standard
43755 You can change the font size with the
43762 \begin_layout Standard
43767 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43772 points have the size of 1
43773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43777 \begin_inset space ~
43781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43783 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43788 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43793 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43794 \begin_inset space ~
43798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43800 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43807 \begin_layout Standard
43810 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43812 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43813 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43814 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43815 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43816 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43818 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43819 \begin_inset space ~
43825 \begin_layout Subsection
43827 \begin_inset Index idx
43830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43831 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43838 \begin_inset Index idx
43841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43850 \begin_layout Standard
43851 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43852 by choosing an item in the
43853 list and selecting the
43860 \begin_layout Standard
43861 By checking the option
43865 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43868 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43869 \begin_inset space ~
43873 \begin_inset space ~
43878 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43881 \begin_layout Subsection
43883 \begin_inset Index idx
43886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43895 \begin_layout Standard
43896 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43900 \begin_layout Standard
43905 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43906 This feature is described in section
43907 \begin_inset space ~
43911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43913 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43920 \begin_layout Standard
43921 Checking the option
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43928 \begin_inset space ~
43932 \begin_inset space ~
43937 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43940 \begin_layout Section
43942 \begin_inset Index idx
43945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43954 \begin_layout Subsection
43958 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43962 \begin_layout Standard
43965 Cursor follows scrollbar
43967 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43971 \begin_layout Standard
43972 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43973 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43974 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43977 \begin_layout Standard
43980 Scroll below end of document
43982 is self-explanatory.
43985 \begin_layout Standard
43986 In \SpecialChar LyX
43987 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43994 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43996 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43997 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
44000 \begin_layout Standard
44003 Sort environments alphabetically
44005 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44008 \begin_layout Standard
44011 Group environments by their category
44013 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44016 \begin_layout Standard
44021 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
44032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44036 \begin_layout Standard
44037 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44042 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44043 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44047 \begin_layout Subsection
44049 \begin_inset Index idx
44052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44059 \begin_inset Index idx
44062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44063 Settings ! Shortcuts
44071 \begin_layout Standard
44076 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44078 Several binding files are available, among them:
44081 \begin_layout Description
44082 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44085 \begin_layout Description
44086 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44098 \begin_layout Description
44099 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44110 \begin_layout Standard
44111 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44116 , and binding files for special languages.
44117 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44122 \begin_inset space \space{}
44126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44134 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44135 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44136 will try to use the appropriate binding
44140 \begin_layout Standard
44141 Some binding files, like
44145 , only have a limited scope.
44146 When looking at the end of the file
44150 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44153 \begin_layout Standard
44157 \begin_inset space ~
44161 \begin_inset space ~
44166 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44167 in the selected key binding file.
44170 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44174 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44179 \begin_inset Index idx
44182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44183 Key Bindings ! Editing
44191 \begin_layout Standard
44192 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44193 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44194 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44195 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44198 Show key-bindings containing
44201 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44202 Insert there for example as keyword
44203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44210 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44211 functions that contain
44212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44220 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44221 All \SpecialChar LyX
44222 functions are also listed in the file
44227 that you will find in the
44234 \begin_layout Standard
44235 For example, to add the shortcut
44243 , select the function and press the
44248 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44249 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44252 \begin_layout Standard
44253 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44254 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44256 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44257 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44259 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44264 \begin_layout Standard
44265 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44268 \begin_layout Standard
44269 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44271 The syntax of the entries is:
44274 \begin_layout Standard
44280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44299 \begin_layout Subsection
44301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44303 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44308 \begin_inset Index idx
44311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44318 \begin_inset Index idx
44321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44322 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44330 \begin_layout Standard
44331 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44332 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44333 provides keyboard maps.
44334 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44335 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44338 \begin_inset space ~
44342 \begin_inset space ~
44347 and select the keyboard map file named
44354 \begin_layout Standard
44363 keyboard map and, if you use the
44367 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44370 arg "keymap-primary"
44376 arg "keymap-secondary"
44379 respectively or toggle between them with
44382 arg "keymap-toggle"
44388 \begin_layout Standard
44389 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44397 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44406 \begin_layout Standard
44407 You can also specify the mouse
44409 Wheel scrolling speed
44412 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44416 Middle mouse button pasting
44418 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44419 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44422 \begin_layout Standard
44430 \begin_inset space ~
44434 \begin_inset space ~
44439 you can select a key for zooming.
44440 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44443 \begin_layout Subsection
44447 \begin_layout Standard
44448 Input completion is described in section
44449 \begin_inset space ~
44453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44455 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44462 \begin_layout Section
44464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44471 \begin_inset Index idx
44474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44481 \begin_inset Index idx
44484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44493 \begin_layout Standard
44494 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44495 are normally determined during
44497 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44500 \begin_layout Description
44502 \begin_inset space ~
44505 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44506 's working directory.
44507 It is the default when you
44518 \begin_inset space ~
44526 \begin_layout Description
44528 \begin_inset space ~
44531 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44533 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44535 \begin_inset space ~
44539 \begin_inset space ~
44547 \begin_layout Description
44549 \begin_inset space ~
44552 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44558 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44562 \begin_inset Newline newline
44566 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44578 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44579 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44587 \begin_layout Description
44589 \begin_inset space ~
44593 \begin_inset Index idx
44596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44602 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44603 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44604 \begin_inset space ~
44608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44610 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44618 will be used to save the backups.
44619 \begin_inset Newline newline
44622 Backup files have the ending
44623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44633 \begin_layout Description
44635 \begin_inset space ~
44638 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44639 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44641 \begin_inset Newline newline
44648 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44654 You can edit this file with the program
44663 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44664 in its preferences under
44667 \begin_inset space ~
44673 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44678 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44680 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44681 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44687 and \SpecialChar LyX
44688 need to be running the same time.
44689 \begin_inset Newline newline
44692 The pipe is also used for the
44696 feature, see section
44697 \begin_inset space ~
44701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44703 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44708 \begin_inset Newline newline
44711 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44712 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44713 \begin_inset Newline newline
44729 \begin_layout Description
44731 \begin_inset space ~
44734 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44737 \begin_layout Description
44739 \begin_inset space ~
44742 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44743 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44744 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44747 \begin_layout Description
44749 \begin_inset space ~
44752 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44758 You only need to specify it if you are using
44762 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44764 For \SpecialChar LyX
44769 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44773 \begin_layout Description
44775 \begin_inset space ~
44778 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44779 When \SpecialChar LyX
44780 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44781 to find it on the system.
44782 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44784 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44793 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44794 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44797 \begin_layout Description
44799 \begin_inset space ~
44802 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44803 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44804 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44805 code or in the document
44807 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44809 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44810 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44811 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44812 scanned for the input files.
44813 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44814 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44816 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44817 compilation may fail for some documents.
44820 \begin_layout Section
44824 \begin_layout Standard
44825 Here you can insert your
44834 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44836 \begin_inset space ~
44840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44842 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44846 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44849 \begin_layout Section
44851 \begin_inset Index idx
44854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44855 Language ! Settings
44861 \begin_inset Index idx
44864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44865 Settings ! Language
44873 \begin_layout Subsection
44875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44877 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44884 \begin_layout Description
44886 \begin_inset space ~
44890 \begin_inset space ~
44893 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44895 You can find its actual translation status here:
44896 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44898 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44905 \begin_layout Description
44907 \begin_inset space ~
44910 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44911 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44912 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44913 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44930 The most widespread language package is
44935 \begin_inset Index idx
44938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44945 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44947 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44948 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44949 come with the alternative
44955 \begin_inset Index idx
44958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44960 -packages ! polyglossia
44965 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44966 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44972 The available selections are described in section
44973 \begin_inset space ~
44977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44979 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44986 \begin_layout Description
44988 \begin_inset space ~
44991 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44992 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44993 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44994 An example is the start command
45000 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
45002 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
45006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45021 selectlanguage{$$lang}
45026 \begin_layout Description
45028 \begin_inset space ~
45036 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45037 command toggles the package on and off.
45040 \begin_layout Description
45042 \begin_inset space ~
45046 \begin_inset space ~
45049 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45053 \begin_layout Description
45055 \begin_inset space ~
45059 \begin_inset space ~
45062 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45066 \begin_layout Description
45068 \begin_inset space ~
45072 \begin_inset space ~
45075 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45076 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45077 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45079 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45086 \begin_layout Description
45088 \begin_inset space ~
45091 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45093 When this option is not set, the
45096 \begin_inset space ~
45101 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45103 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45106 \begin_inset space ~
45114 \begin_layout Description
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45122 \begin_inset space ~
45128 When it is not set, the
45131 \begin_inset space ~
45136 is set to the end of the document.
45139 \begin_layout Description
45141 \begin_inset space ~
45145 \begin_inset space ~
45148 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45149 language will be underlined in blue.
45152 \begin_layout Description
45154 \begin_inset space ~
45158 \begin_inset space ~
45161 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45162 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45165 \begin_layout Description
45167 \begin_inset space ~
45170 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45171 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45172 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45173 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45176 \begin_layout Subsection
45180 \begin_layout Standard
45181 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45182 \begin_inset space ~
45186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45188 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45195 \begin_layout Section
45199 \begin_layout Subsection
45201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45203 name "subsec:General-output"
45210 \begin_layout Description
45212 \begin_inset space ~
45215 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45217 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45219 \begin_inset space ~
45225 For a detailed description see section
45227 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45232 \begin_inset space ~
45240 \begin_layout Description
45242 \begin_inset space ~
45245 Options Options for the program
45249 that is used for the export format
45254 \begin_inset space ~
45258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45260 reference "subsec:Export"
45265 Possible options are listed in the
45270 \begin_inset Newline newline
45274 \begin_inset Flex URL
45277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45279 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45289 \begin_layout Description
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45295 \begin_inset space ~
45298 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45301 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45302 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45304 \begin_inset space ~
45310 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45313 \begin_layout Description
45315 \begin_inset space ~
45319 \begin_inset Index idx
45322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45329 \begin_inset Index idx
45332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45333 Settings ! Date format
45338 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45339 \begin_inset Newline newline
45343 \begin_inset Flex URL
45346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45348 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45354 \begin_inset Newline newline
45357 For example the format
45358 \begin_inset Newline newline
45362 \begin_inset Newline newline
45365 prints the date as day/month/year.
45368 \begin_layout Description
45370 \begin_inset space ~
45374 \begin_inset space ~
45377 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45378 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45381 \begin_layout Subsection
45387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45389 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45394 \begin_inset Index idx
45397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45398 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45407 \begin_layout Description
45409 \begin_inset space ~
45417 \begin_inset space ~
45421 \begin_inset space ~
45424 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45429 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45450 are used for Cyrillic.
45451 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45464 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45466 sets up in the background.
45467 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45470 \begin_layout Description
45472 \begin_inset space ~
45476 \begin_inset space ~
45480 \begin_inset space ~
45484 \begin_inset space ~
45487 options They only have an effect when the program
45491 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45494 \begin_layout Standard
45495 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45496 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45497 manuals of the applications.
45500 \begin_layout Description
45502 \begin_inset space ~
45505 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45506 \begin_inset space ~
45510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45512 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45519 \begin_layout Description
45521 \begin_inset space ~
45524 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45525 \begin_inset space ~
45529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45531 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45538 \begin_layout Description
45540 \begin_inset space ~
45543 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45544 \begin_inset space ~
45548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45550 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45557 \begin_layout Description
45563 \begin_inset space ~
45566 command Command for the program
45568 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45571 that is described in the section
45573 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45578 Additional Features
45583 \begin_layout Standard
45584 There are additionally the following options:
45587 \begin_layout Description
45589 \begin_inset space ~
45593 \begin_inset space ~
45597 \begin_inset space ~
45601 \begin_inset space ~
45606 \begin_inset space ~
45609 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45627 to separate folders.
45628 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45630 \begin_inset Index idx
45633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45640 \begin_inset Index idx
45643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45652 \begin_layout Description
45654 \begin_inset space ~
45658 \begin_inset space ~
45662 \begin_inset space ~
45666 \begin_inset space ~
45670 \begin_inset space ~
45674 \begin_inset space ~
45677 changes Removes all manually set
45683 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45684 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45686 \begin_inset space ~
45691 dialog when changing the document class.
45694 \begin_layout Section
45696 \begin_inset space ~
45700 \begin_inset Index idx
45703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45712 \begin_layout Subsection
45714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45716 name "subsec:Converters"
45721 \begin_inset Index idx
45724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45733 \begin_layout Standard
45734 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45735 from one format to another.
45736 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45737 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45744 \begin_inset space ~
45749 field and press the
45754 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45758 \begin_inset space ~
45763 drop-down list, modify the
45767 field and press the
45774 \begin_layout Standard
45777 Converter File Cache
45783 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45785 Maximum Age (in days
45788 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45789 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45793 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45794 definition, is described in the section
45805 \begin_layout Subsection
45807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45809 name "sec:File-Formats"
45814 \begin_inset Index idx
45817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45824 \begin_inset Index idx
45827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45836 \begin_layout Standard
45837 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45847 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45850 \begin_layout Standard
45851 You can also define the
45853 Default output format
45855 that is used when you use
45857 View, Update, View Master Document
45861 Update Master Document
45867 menu or the toolbar.
45870 \begin_layout Standard
45871 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45882 \begin_layout Standard
45883 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45885 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45886 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45887 This is done by specifying a
45892 More about this is described in the section
45903 \begin_layout Chapter
45904 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45906 \begin_inset Index idx
45909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45918 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45925 \begin_layout Standard
45927 \begin_inset space ~
45931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45933 reference "tab:Units"
45937 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45938 and used in this documentation.
45941 \begin_layout Standard
45942 \begin_inset Float table
45948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45949 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45967 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45975 \begin_inset Tabular
45976 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45977 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45978 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45979 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45980 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46186 scaled point (65536
46187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46265 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46338 % of original image width
46343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46654 \begin_layout Chapter
46656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46658 name "chap:Credits"
46665 \begin_layout Standard
46666 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46667 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46670 \begin_layout Itemize
46673 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46676 \begin_layout Itemize
46682 \begin_layout Itemize
46688 \begin_layout Itemize
46694 \begin_layout Itemize
46700 \begin_layout Itemize
46706 \begin_layout Itemize
46712 \begin_layout Itemize
46718 \begin_layout Itemize
46721 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46724 \begin_layout Itemize
46730 \begin_layout Itemize
46736 \begin_layout Itemize
46742 \begin_layout Itemize
46748 \begin_layout Itemize
46754 \begin_layout Itemize
46760 \begin_layout Itemize
46766 \begin_layout Itemize
46772 \begin_layout Itemize
46773 The \SpecialChar LyX
46775 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46784 \begin_layout Standard
46785 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46788 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46795 \begin_layout Bibliography
46796 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46797 LatexCommand bibitem
46803 The \SpecialChar LyX
46805 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46808 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46813 \begin_inset Newline newline
46817 \begin_inset Flex URL
46820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46822 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46830 \begin_layout Bibliography
46831 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46832 LatexCommand bibitem
46833 key "latexcompanion"
46837 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46839 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46840 Companion Second Edition.
46843 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46846 \begin_layout Bibliography
46847 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46848 LatexCommand bibitem
46853 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46856 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46860 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46863 \begin_layout Bibliography
46864 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46865 LatexCommand bibitem
46873 : A Document Preparation System.
46876 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46879 \begin_layout Bibliography
46880 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46881 LatexCommand bibitem
46890 The \SpecialChar TeX
46894 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46897 \begin_layout Bibliography
46898 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46899 LatexCommand bibitem
46904 The \SpecialChar TeX
46906 \begin_inset Newline newline
46910 \begin_inset Flex URL
46913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46915 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46923 \begin_layout Bibliography
46924 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46925 LatexCommand bibitem
46930 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46932 \begin_inset Newline newline
46936 \begin_inset Flex URL
46939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46941 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46949 \begin_layout Bibliography
46950 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46951 LatexCommand bibitem
46957 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46959 name "Documentation"
46960 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46966 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46970 \begin_inset Newline newline
46974 \begin_inset Flex URL
46977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46979 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46987 \begin_layout Bibliography
46988 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46989 LatexCommand bibitem
46995 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46997 name "Documentation"
46998 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
47002 how to use the program
47004 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47008 \begin_inset Newline newline
47012 \begin_inset Flex URL
47015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47017 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
47025 \begin_layout Bibliography
47026 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47027 LatexCommand bibitem
47033 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47035 name "Documentation"
47036 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47045 \begin_inset Newline newline
47049 \begin_inset Flex URL
47052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47054 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47062 \begin_layout Bibliography
47063 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47064 LatexCommand bibitem
47065 key "makeindex-man"
47070 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47073 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
47082 \begin_inset Newline newline
47086 \begin_inset Flex URL
47089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47091 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
47099 \begin_layout Bibliography
47100 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47101 LatexCommand bibitem
47107 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47109 name "Documentation"
47110 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47119 \begin_inset Newline newline
47123 \begin_inset Flex URL
47126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47128 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47136 \begin_layout Bibliography
47137 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47138 LatexCommand bibitem
47144 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47146 name "Documentation"
47147 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47151 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47153 \begin_inset Newline newline
47157 \begin_inset Flex URL
47160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47162 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47170 \begin_layout Bibliography
47171 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47172 LatexCommand bibitem
47178 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47180 name "Documentation"
47181 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47185 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47191 \begin_inset Index idx
47194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47196 -packages ! caption
47202 \begin_inset Newline newline
47206 \begin_inset Flex URL
47209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47211 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47219 \begin_layout Bibliography
47220 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47221 LatexCommand bibitem
47227 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47229 name "Documentation"
47230 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47234 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47240 \begin_inset Index idx
47243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47245 -packages ! enumitem
47251 \begin_inset Newline newline
47255 \begin_inset Flex URL
47258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47260 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47268 \begin_layout Bibliography
47269 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47270 LatexCommand bibitem
47276 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47278 name "Documentation"
47279 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47283 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47289 \begin_inset Index idx
47292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47294 -packages ! fancyhdr
47300 \begin_inset Newline newline
47304 \begin_inset Flex URL
47307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47309 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47317 \begin_layout Bibliography
47318 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47319 LatexCommand bibitem
47325 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47327 name "Documentation"
47328 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47332 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47338 \begin_inset Index idx
47341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47343 -packages ! hyperref
47349 \begin_inset Newline newline
47353 \begin_inset Flex URL
47356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47358 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47366 \begin_layout Bibliography
47367 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47368 LatexCommand bibitem
47374 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47376 name "Documentation"
47377 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47381 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47387 \begin_inset Index idx
47390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47392 -packages ! nomencl
47398 \begin_inset Newline newline
47402 \begin_inset Flex URL
47405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47407 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47415 \begin_layout Bibliography
47416 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47417 LatexCommand bibitem
47423 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47425 name "Documentation"
47426 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47430 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47436 \begin_inset Index idx
47439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47441 -packages ! prettyref
47447 \begin_inset Newline newline
47451 \begin_inset Flex URL
47454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47456 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47464 \begin_layout Bibliography
47465 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47466 LatexCommand bibitem
47472 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47474 name "Documentation"
47475 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47479 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47485 \begin_inset Index idx
47488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47490 -packages ! refstyle
47496 \begin_inset Newline newline
47500 \begin_inset Flex URL
47503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47505 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47513 \begin_layout Bibliography
47514 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47515 LatexCommand bibitem
47521 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47524 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47528 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47530 \begin_inset Newline newline
47534 \begin_inset Flex URL
47537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47539 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47547 \begin_layout Bibliography
47548 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47549 LatexCommand bibitem
47555 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47558 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47562 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47564 \begin_inset Newline newline
47568 \begin_inset Flex URL
47571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47573 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47581 \begin_layout Bibliography
47582 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47583 LatexCommand bibitem
47589 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47592 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47596 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47597 for Cyrillic languages:
47598 \begin_inset Newline newline
47602 \begin_inset Flex URL
47605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47607 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47615 \begin_layout Bibliography
47616 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47617 LatexCommand bibitem
47623 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47626 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47630 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47632 \begin_inset Newline newline
47636 \begin_inset Flex URL
47639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47641 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47649 \begin_layout Bibliography
47650 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47651 LatexCommand bibitem
47657 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47660 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47664 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47666 \begin_inset Newline newline
47670 \begin_inset Flex URL
47673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47675 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47683 \begin_layout Bibliography
47684 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47685 LatexCommand bibitem
47691 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47694 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47698 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47700 \begin_inset Newline newline
47704 \begin_inset Flex URL
47707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47709 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47717 \begin_layout Bibliography
47718 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47719 LatexCommand bibitem
47725 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47728 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47732 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47734 \begin_inset Newline newline
47738 \begin_inset Flex URL
47741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47743 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47751 \begin_layout Bibliography
47752 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47753 LatexCommand bibitem
47759 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47762 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47766 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47768 \begin_inset Newline newline
47772 \begin_inset Flex URL
47775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47777 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47785 \begin_layout Bibliography
47786 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47787 LatexCommand bibitem
47793 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47796 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47800 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47802 \begin_inset Newline newline
47806 \begin_inset Flex URL
47809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47811 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47819 \begin_layout Bibliography
47820 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47821 LatexCommand bibitem
47827 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47830 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47834 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47836 \begin_inset Newline newline
47840 \begin_inset Flex URL
47843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47845 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47853 \begin_layout Bibliography
47854 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47855 LatexCommand bibitem
47861 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47864 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47868 about new features in
47874 \begin_inset Newline newline
47878 \begin_inset Flex URL
47881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47883 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47891 \begin_layout Standard
47892 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47926 \begin_inset Note Note
47929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47936 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47937 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47938 bibliography is the second one:
47946 \begin_layout Standard
47947 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47948 LatexCommand bibtex
47949 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47950 options "biblio/alphadin"
47957 \begin_layout Standard
47958 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47962 \begin_layout Standard
47963 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47964 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47970 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47971 LatexCommand printindex